I
United States       Office of Air Quality        EPA - 450/1 -89-004
Environmental Protection  Planning and Standards       July 1989
Agency         Research Triangle Park NC 27711

Air/Superfund
      «rEPA       AIR / SUPERFUND
 I                 NATIONAL TECHNICAL
 1                 GUIDANCE STUDY SERIES
 I
 |                 Volume IV - Procedures
                   for Dispersion Modeling
 1                 and Air Monitoring for
                   Superfund Air Pathway
                   Analysis

                   Interim
 I
 I
 I

-------
1
I
I
1
•
I
I
•
1
I
I
I
I
I
                             PROCEDURES FOR CONDUCTING AIR PATHWAY
                              ANALYSES FOR SUPERFUND APPLICATIONS
                                            VOLUME IV
                               Procedures for Dispersion Modeling
                                     and Air Monitoring for
                                 Superfund Air Pathway Analysis
•                                        Interim Final

I
I
I                       Mr. Mark E. Garrison, Work Assignment Manager
                              U.S.  ENVIRONMENTAL  PROTECTION AGENCY
                          OFFICE OF AIR QUALITY PLANNING AND STANDARDS
                          RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, NORTH CAROLINA 27711
                                           July  1989

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                   PREFACE
     This Is one in a series of manuals dealing with air pathway analysis at
hazardous waste sites.  This document was developed for the Office of Air
Quality Planning and Standards in cooperation with the Office of Emergency
and Remedial Response (Superfund).  It has been reviewed by the National
Technical Guidance Study Technical Advisory Committee and an expanded review
group consisting of State agencies, various groups within the U.S. Environ-
mental Protection Agency, and the private sector.  This document is an
interim final manual offering technical guidance for use by a diverse
audience including EPA Air and Superfund Regional and Headquarters staff,
State Air and Superfund program staff, Federal and State remedial and removal
contractors, and potentially responsible parties in analyzing air pathways at
hazardous waste sites.  This manual is written to serve the needs of in-
dividuals having different levels of scientific training and experience in
designing, conducting, and reviewing air pathway analyses.  Because assump-
tions and judgments are required in many parts of the analysis, the in-
dividuals conducting air pathway analyses need a strong technical background
in air emission measurements, modeling, and monitoring.  Remedial Project
Managers, On Scene Coordinators, and the Regional Air program staff,
supported by the technical expertise of their contractors, will use this
guide when establishing data quality objectives and the appropriate
scientific approach to air pathway analysis.  This manual provides for flexi-
bility in tailoring the air pathway analysis to the specific conditions of
each site, the relative risk posed by this and other pathways, and the pro-
gram resource constraints.

     Air pathway analyses cannot be reduced to simple "cookbook" procedures.
Therefore, the manual is designed to be flexible, allowing use of profes-
sional judgment.  The procedures set out in this manual are intended solely
for technical guidance.  These procedures are not intended, nor can they be
relied upon, to create rights substantive or procedural, enforceable by any
party in litigation with the United States.

     It is envisioned that this manual will be periodically updated to incor-
porate new data and information on air pathway analysis procedures.  The
Agency reserves the right to act at variance with these procedures and to
change them as new information and technical tools become available on air
pathway analyses without formal public notice.  The Agency will, however,
attempt to make any revised or updated manual available to those who
currently have a copy through the registration form included with the manual.

     Copies of this report are available, as supplies permit, through the
Library Services Office (MD-35), U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency,
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711 or from the National Technical
Information Services, 5285 Port Royal  Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161.


                                    iii

-------
                                  DISCLAIMER

          Mention of trade names or commercial  products does not constitute
endorsement or recommendation for use by the Air Management Division, U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency.
                                       IV

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS

                                                                        Page

DISCLAIMER	     i i
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT	    i i i
ACRONYMS	     iv

1.0       INTRODUCTION	    1-1

2.0       ATMOSPHERIC DISPERSION MODELING PROCEDURE	    2-1
          2.1  Overview	    2-1
          2.2  Step 1 - Collect and Review Input Information	    2-13
               2.2.1  Overview	    2-13
               2.2.2  Source Data	    2-17
               2.2.3  Receptor Data	    2-19
               2.2.4  Environmental Characteristics	    2-21
               2.2.5  Previous APA Data	    2-27

          2.3  Step 2 - Select Modeling Sophistication Level	    2-28
               2.3.1  Overview	    2-28
               2.3.2  Selection of Models as a Function of
                        Sophistication Levels	  2-29

          2.4  Step 3 - Develop Modeling Plan	    2-37
               2.4.1  Overview	    2-37
               2.4.2  Dispersion Modeling Data Quality Objectives...    2-40
               2.4.3  Select Modeling Constituents	    2-40
               2.4.4  Define Emission Inventory Methodology	    2-46
               2.4.5  Define Meteorological  DataBase	    2-49
               2.4.6  Design Receptor Grid	    2-53
               2.4.7  Detailed Modeling Methodology	    2-56
               2.4.8  Estimated Background Concentrations	    2-58
               2.4.9  Define Dispersion Calculations  to be Performed    2-59
               2.4.10 Document the  Modeling  Plan	    2-60

          2.5  Step 4 -  Conduct Modeling	    2-60
               2.5.1  Overview	    2-60
               2.5.2  Staff Qualifications and Training	    2-60
               2.5.3  Performance of Modeling	    2-61

          2.6  Step 5 -  Summarize and Evaluate Results	    2-67
               2.6.1  Overview	    2-67
               2.6.2  Summarize Data	    2-68
               2.6.3  Evaluate Modeling Results	    2-72
               2.6.4  Prepare a Report	    2-81

-------
                         TABLE OF CONTENTS  (Continued)

                                                                        Page

3.0       AIR MONITORING PROCEDURES.	    3-1

          3.1  Overview	    3-1

          3.2  Step 1 - Collect and Review Input Information	    3-7
               3.2.1  Overview	    3-7
               3.2.2  Source Data....	    3-8
               3.2.3  Receptor Data..	    3-11
               3.2.4  Environmental Characteristics	    3-12
               3.2.5  Previous APA Data	    3-13

          3.3  Step 2 - Select Monitoring Sophistication Level	    3-16
               3.3.1  Overview	    3-16
               3.3.2  Definition of Monitoring Sophistication Levels    3-20

          3.4  Step 3 - Develop Monitoring Plan	    3-25
               3.4.1  Overview	    3-25
               3.4.2  Select Monitoring constituents	    3-25
               3.4.3  Specify Meteorological  Program	    3-35
               3.4.4  Design Monitoring Network	    3-41
               3.4.5  Document Air Monitoring Plan	    3-63

          3.5  Step 4 - Conduct Monitoring	    3-91
               3.5.1  Overview	    3-91
               3.5.2  Field Staff Qualifications and Training	    3-91
               3.5.3  Quality Assurance/Quality Control	    3-94

          3.6  Step 5 - Summarize and  Evaluate Results	    3-98
               3.6.1  Overview	    3-98
               3.6.2  Validate Data	    3-103
               3.6.3  Summarize Data	    3-108
               3.6.4  Perform Dispersion Modeling	    3-116

4.0       CASE EXAMPLES	    4-1

          4.1  Overview	    4-1

          4.2  Example 1 - Dispersion  Modeling/Air Monitoring
               Appl ications	    4-2
               4.2.1  Site Description	    4-3
               4.2.2  Example 1 - Dispersion  Modeling Study	    4-4
               4.2.3  Example 1 - Air  Monitoring Study	    4-11

          4.3  Example 2 - Air Monitoring Application	    4-16

          4.4  Example 3 - Air Monitoring Application	    4-20

          4.5  Example 4 - Air Monitoring Application	    4-24

-------
I
I
•                                TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
•                                                                               Page
A       5.0       REFERENCES	    5-1

•                 APPENDIX A: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AIR MONITORING METHODS
                   APPENDIX B: EXCERPT  FROM TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE DOCUMENT FOR SAMPLING
_                             AND ANALYSIS OF TOXIC ORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR
•                             (U.S. EPA, JUNE 1983)
                   APPENDIX C: BACKGROUND INFORMATION
I

I

I

I

I

I

I

1

I

I

I

I

I

-------

-------
1
1
1

1
1

1

1

1

1
1

1

1
1
1

1
1
1

1
1



ACGIH
ACL
AO
APA
APCD
ARAR

ATSDR
CAA
CAS
CD
CERCLA
CERCLIS

CERI
CFR
CR
CRF
CWA
DQO
ORE
EDO
ERT
ESP
FIFRA
FP

             SUPERFUND ABBREVIATIONS/ACRONYMS
American Conference of Government Industrial Hygienists
Alternate Concentration Limit
Administrative Order on Consent
Air Pathway Analysis
Air Pollution Control Device
Applicable or Relevant and Appropriate Requirement (Cleanup
Standard)
Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry
Clean Air Act
Carbon Adsorption System
Consent Decree
Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability
Act
Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability
Information System
Center for Environmental Research Information
Code of Federal Regulations
Community Relations
Combustion Research Facility -- Pine Bluff, Arkansas
Clean Water Act
Data Quality Objective
Destruction and Removal Efficiency
Enforcement Decision Document
Environmental Response Team
Electrostatic Precipitator
Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act
Fine Particualte
                            ix

-------
FS        Feasibility Study
HRS       Hazard Ranking System
HSWA      Hazardous Waste Engineering Amendments to RCRA, 1984
HWERL     Hazardous Waste Engineering Research Laboratory
IDLH      Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health
MCL       Maximum Contaminant Level
MCLG      Maximum Contaminant Level Goal
NBAR      Non-binding Preliminary Allocation of Responsibility
NCP       National Contingency Plan
NEIC      National Enforcement Investigations Center
CFPA      National Fire Protection Association
NIOSH     National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
NPL       National Priorities List
NRC       National Response Center
NRT       National Response Team
NTIS      National Technical Information Service
OERR      Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
O&M       Operation and Maintenance
ORD       Office of Research and Development
OSC       On-Scene Coordinator
OSH Act   Occupational Safety and Health Act
OSHA      Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OSWER     Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Repsonse
OTA       Office of Technology Assessment
PA        Preliminary Assessment
PEL       Permissible Exposure Limits

-------
I
I
         PIC        Products  of  Incomplete  Combustion
         PM-20      Particualte Matter  with  Physical  Diameter  <20  urn
•       PRP        Potentially Responsible  Party
         QA/QC      Quality Assurance/Quality  Control
I       QAPP       Quality Assurance Project  Plan
M       RA         Remedial Action
         RCRA       Resource Conversation  and  Recovery  Act
•       RD         Remedial Design
         REL        Recommended Exposure Limit
£       RI         Remedial Investigation
—       RI/FS      Remedial Investigation/Feasibility  Study
™       ROD        Record of  Decision
•       RPM        Remedial Project Manager
         RRT        Regional Response Team
I       RQ         Reportable Quantity
         SAB        Science Advisory Board
I       SARA       Superfund  Amendments and Reauthorization Act
•       SCAP       Superfund  Comprehensive  Accomplishments Plan
         SI         Site  Inspection
•       SITE       Superfund  Innovative Technology  Evaluation
         SWDA       Solid Waste Disposal Act (RCRA predecessor)
I       TLV        Threshold  Limit Value
g       TLV-C      Threshold  Limit Value  -  Ceiling
         TLV-STEL   Threshold  Limit Value  -  Short-Term  Exposure Limit
•       TLV-TWA    Threshold  Limit Value  -  Time-Weighted Average
         TSDF       Treatment  Storage and  Disposal Facility
|       TSCA       Toxic Substances Control Act
I
XI

-------
TSP       Total Suspended Particulate
Title III Emergency Planning and Community Right-To-Know Act (SARA)
T&E       Testing and Evaluation
UST       Underground Storage Tank
VO        Volatile Organics
VOC       Volatile Organic Compound
                                      xn

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                               ACKNOWLEDGMENT


     This document was prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA) by NUS Corporation and Radian Corporation.  The project was managed by
Mr. Mark Garrison, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, who is
assigned to the EPA-Region III.  The principal authors were Dr. Amiram
Roffman and Mr. Ronald Stoner of NUS.  The authors would like to thank Mr.
Jim Vickery and Mr. Joseph LaFornara of the EPA Office of Emergency and
Remedial Response as well as Mr. Joseph Padgett, Mr. Stan Sleva, Mr. Joseph
Tikvart, and Mr. James Durham of the EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards, and Mr. Al Cimorelli of EPA, Region III for their guidance and

direction.  The authors would also like to acknowledge Mr. Robert Jubach, Mr.
Thomas laccarino, Mr. Hank Firstenberg, Mr. Jeffrey Panek, and Ms. Elizabeth
Butler for their overall contribution to this document.  Mr. Bart Eklund of
Radian Corporation provided the final editing of the material and portions of

Section 4.
                                     xiii

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                   SECTION 1

                                 INTRODUCTION


           The multivolume set of Procedures  for Conducting  Air Pathway

Analyses  for Superfund Applications  has been developed  1n response  to

increased concern by the U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency  (EPA)  regarding

the  potential  for hazardous air emissions  from Superfund sites.  These

emissions can occur  at hazardous spill  locations and  undisturbed Superfund

sites,  as well  as during site cleanups.  Under the  Comprehensive Environmental

Response,  Compensation,  and Liability Act  (CERCLA)  and  the  recent Superfund

Amendments and  Reauthorization Act  (SARA), EPA has  the  responsibility  for

assessment and  cleanup of these Superfund  sites.  Although  air emissions pose

a potential  human health risk from air  emissions at these sites, comprehensive

national  guidance did not exist for  determining the magnitude  and impact of

these emissions.   Therefore,  the goal of these Procedures is to provide

technical  recommendations for the conduct  of air pathway analyses (APAs) that

meet the  needs  of the Superfund process, presenting alternative technical

approaches  for  the conduct of APAs and  providing  recommendations for preferred

or default  approaches.   The Procedures  are intended for use by EPA Remedial

Project Managers  (RPMs),  Enforcement Project  Managers (EPMs),  and air  experts,

as well as  by EPA Superfund contractors.  The  procedures are also generally

applicable  to hazardous  waste sites  not  included  on the NPL.


          The Procedures  for  Conducting Air  Pathway Analyses for Superfund

Applications consists  of four volumes:


          •    Volume  I  -  Application of Air  Pathway Analyses  for Superfund

               Activities


          •    Volume  II  -  Estimation of Baseline Emissions at Superfund Sites
                                      1-1

-------
           t    Volume III - Estimation of Air Emissions from Cleanup
                Activities at Suoerfund Sites

           •    Volume IV - Procedures for Dispersion Modeling and Air
                Monitoring for Superfund Air Pathway Analyses.

           Volume I defines the general approach for the conduct of APAs and
 references appropriate sections within Volumes II-IV for detailed technical
•procedures regarding modeling and monitoring techniques.   Volume II provides
 procedures for developing baseline air emission estimates,  and Volume III
 provides procedures for estimating air emission impacts from remedial  actions.
 Specifically,  Volumes II-IV present alternative and preferred or default
 modeling techniques and monitoring techniques for implementing the APA
 approaches selected based on Volume I recommendations.   This information will
 be primarily of interest to EPA air experts and Superfund contractors
 responsible for the conduct of APAs.   However,  the technical  procedures
 provided in Volumes II-IV are not specific to Superfund activities.
 Therefore, Volumes II-IV will also be useful  to state air staff responsible
 for supporting hazardous waste site cleanup.

           The  emphasis of Volume IV is on providing technical  procedures for
 dispersion modeling and air monitoring.   Volume IV provides  the procedures  for
 implementing activity-specific and source-specific dispersion modeling/air
 monitoring recommendations provided in Volume I.   Volumes II  and III  also
 cross-reference Volume IV for certain air emission characterization approaches
 that require the conduct of dispersion modeling and/or  air monitoring.   In
 addition,  implementation of Volume IV procedures  frequently  requires  source
 emission rate  inputs that can be developed through application of Volumes II
 and III.
                                      1-2

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Section 2 of this volume presents procedures for the application of
atmospheric dispersion modeling as a methodology to assess potential exposures
associated with air emissions from a Superfund site.  This material will
include criteria as well as recommendations for selecting models, obtaining
required input data, and interpreting modeling results.  These procedures
address technical issues that are significant for Superfund applications.
Therefore, the procedures presented in Section 2 should be considered as
supplemental to, but not replacements for, the Guideline On Air Quality Models
(U.S. EPA, 1986).

          Section 3 presents procedures for the application of air monitoring
to characterize downwind exposure conditions from Superfund air emission
sources.  These procedures discuss the technical challenges involved in the
design and implementation of an air toxic monitoring program.  Again, the
emphasis has been on providing recommendations specific to conducting
Superfund APAs.  Therefore, available standard procedures for conducting air
toxic monitoring programs are identified and summarized.  However, the
material has also been adapted and supplemented as necessary to address
Superfund applications.

          The technical procedures presented in Volumes II-IV are based on the
general  format illustrated in Figure 1 and discussed in Volume I.  The major
elements of these procedures are as follows:

          •    Collect and review APA input information
          t    Select APA sophistication level
          •    Develop APA plan
          •    Conduct APA
          t    Summarize/evaluate results
          t    Evaluate need for additional analyses.

          Data quality objectives (DQOs) should be considered during each
step.  The following is a brief discussion of each of these procedural  steps.
                                      1-3

-------
                  APA RECOMMENDATIONS (Volume I)
                 Activity-specific recommendations
                 Source-specific recommendations
                 Modeling/monitoring recommendations
                               1
             COLLECT AND REVIEW APA INPUT INFORMATION

               • Source Data
               • Environmental Data
               • Receptor/Population Data
EPA TECHNICAL
GUIDELINES
                 SELECT APA SOPHISTICATION LEVEL

               • Screening
               • Refined
   DEVELOP APA PLAN

• Technical Approach
• Evaluate APA Uncertainty
Peer Review/
RPM Approval
                               JL
                           CONDUCT APA
               • Quality Control
               • Documentation
                   SUMMARIZE/EVALUATE RESULTS

               • Data Review
               • Data Format
               • Comparison to Health Criteria
               • Consider APA Uncertainty
             Yes
                           No
                   ADDITIONAL ANALYSES NEEDED?
                                  Input to EPA
                                    Remedial/
                                    Removal
                                    Decision
                                     Making
Figure 1.  Superfund Air Pathway Analyses Technical Procedures  -
           General Format.
                                1-4

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Step 1 - Collect and Review Input Information--This initial step
addresses the process of collecting and compiling existing information
pertinent to previous site-specific APAs based on a literature survey.  It
includes obtaining available source, receptor, and environmental data.  Once
the existing data have been collected, compiled, and evaluated, data gaps can
be defined and a coherent monitoring plan or modeling plan developed based on
the site-specific requirements.

          Step 2 - Select APA Sophistication Level--This step involves the
selection of the APA sophistication level considering screening versus refined
monitoring and modeling techniques.  This selection process depends on program
objectives as well as available resource and technical constraints.  Technical
aspects that should be considered include the availability of appropriate
monitoring and modeling techniques.

          Step 3 - Develop APA PI an--This step involves preparation of an APA
plan.  The APA should include documentation of the selected technical approach
(e.g., nonrepresentative input data, modeling inaccuracies and monitoring
limitations).  The application of Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) will be an
important aspect in the development of an APA plan.  The selected approach
should be based on EPA technical guidelines, as available.  The APA plan also
facilitates peer review of the technical approach and a formal process for
approval of the APA by the RPM/EPM.  The peer review process may involve EPA
air experts or contractor support.

          Step 4 - Conduct APA--This step involves the implementation of the
APA plan developed during Step 3.  The emphasis during Step 4 is on conducting
the APA commensurate with appropriate QC measures and DQO criteria.  This also
involves documentation of the APA process (to facilitate the QC process and
establish an information base that may be useful for APAs at other Superfund
sites).
                                      1-5

-------
          Step 5 - Summarize and Evaluate Results—This step Involves
reviewing data and evaluating APA results for validity.  Additional  components
of this step should Include (a) data processing;  (b)  preparation of
statistical summaries; (c) comparison of upwind and downwind concentration
results; and (d) concentration mapping,  If possible.   Estimates of data
uncertainties based on Instrument limitations and analytical technique
inaccuracies should also be obtained and used to qualify air monitoring
results.  Results can be compared to applicable or relevant and appropriate
(ARAR) air criteria and other Superfund  health and safety criteria.   The
results of Step 5 can also provide input to the Superfund risk assessment
process.

          This approach ensures that a common thought process and strategy are
used to plan and conduct APAs for Superfund application.  As demonstrated in
Sections 2-3, this general approach has  been adapted for each of the technical
procedures presented in Volume IV.
                                      1-6

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                   SECTION 2

                   ATMOSPHERIC DISPERSION MODELING PROCEDURE


2.1       OVERVIEW


          Atmospheric dispersion modeling is an air pathway analysis  (APA)

approach that can provide calculated contaminant concentrations at receptor

locations of interest based on emission rate and meteorological data.

Atmospheric dispersion modeling for Superfund activities is an integral part

of the planning and decision-making process for the protection of public

health and the environment.  Dispersion modeling results may be useful at all

stages of the Superfund process and are especially necessary for predicting

impacts from proposed remedial actions.  This section provides procedures for

the selection and application of dispersion modeling approaches for Superfund

APAs.


          The two major dispersion modeling applications for Superfund are:


          •    To estimate concentrations at receptors of interest using input

               emission rate data based on field measurements or emission

               model predictions; and


          t    To design an air monitoring program (i.e. selecting monitoring

               locations and periods) as well as in interpreting and

               extrapolating monitoring results.


          Atmospheric dispersion models can be used when designing an air

monitoring program to see how offsite areas of high concentration relate to

actual receptor locations.  Places where high-concentration areas correspond

to actual  receptors are priority locations for air monitoring stations.
                                      2-1

-------
          Dispersion models can also be used to provide seasonal dispersion
concentration patterns based on available representative historical
meteorological data (either onsite or offsite).  These dispersion patterns can
be used to evaluate the representativeness of any air monitoring data
collection period.  Data representativeness is determined by comparing the
dispersion concentration patterns for the air monitoring period with
historical seasonal dispersion concentration patterns.

          It is often not practical to place air monitoring stations at actual
offsite receptor locations of interest.  It will be necessary, however, to
characterize concentrations at these locations to conduct a health and
environmental assessment.  In these cases, dispersion patterns based on
modeling results can be used to extrapolate concentrations monitored at the
Superfund site to offsite receptor locations.

          A summary of Superfund APA dispersion modeling recommendations and
objectives is presented in Table 1.  These recommendations are presented as a
function of source classification and Superfund activities.  Emission rate
inputs for dispersion modeling applications should be based on technical
procedures presented in Volumes II and III.  Meteorological modeling input
data should preferably be based on an onsite monitoring program.   (See
Sections 2.2. and 3.4.3 of this volume).  The preferred dispersion model for
Superfund APA applications is the Industrial Source Complex (ISC) model.  This
model can be used for estimating short-term concentrations (i.e., the ISCST
version) and long-term concentrations (i.e., ISCLT version) for a variety of
Superfund sources.  Further discussions of dispersion model selection are
included in Sections 2.3 and 2.4.  It is also recommended that near real-time
concentration estimates associated with nonroutine air releases be developed,
as necessary.  A combination of monitoring/modeling approaches is  recommended
to provide this capability.  An example of this approach is provided in
Appendix C.
                                      2-2

-------
                       TABLE  1.   SUMMARY  OF  DISPERSION  MODELING  RECOMMENDATIONS  AND OBJECTIVES
           Source
       Classification
Dispersion Modeling Objectives
   APA Recommendations
Superfund Activities
       Pre-Remediation
       Source
ro
i
<*>
   Provide sufficient data
   base on concentrations of
   air toxic contaminants for
   performing a detailed risk
   assessment of public health
   and the environment for on-
   site, perimeter and off-
   site receptors for the
   baseline conditions (no-
   action alternative).

   Provide sufficient data
   base on concentrations of
   air toxic contaminants for
   performing a detailed risk
   assessment of public health
   and the environment for on-
   site, perimeter and off-
   site receptors for the
   various remedial
   alternatives.

   Provide input to the design
   of air monitoring program
   step.
Characterize baseline air
concentration:

-  Obtain emission rate
   estimates based on
   procedures presented in
   Volumes II and III.

-  Obtain meteorological input
   data based on an on-site
   monitoring program pursuant
   to recommendations
   presented in Volume IV -
   Section 3.4.3.

-  Conduct dispersion modeling
   based on considering ISC as
   the preferred model for
   Superfund APA applications.
  RI/FS - Screening/
  refined APA.
                                                                                                (Continued)

-------
                                                 TABLE 1. (Continued)
            Source
        Classification
Dispersion Modeling Objectives
     APA Recommendations
    Superfund
    Activities
        Remediation
        source
   Provide air quality data to
   assess the affects of the
   remedial action evaluated.

   Provide input to the design
   of air monitoring program
   for this step.
IN*
Characterize air
concentrations during
remedial/removal activities:

-  Obtain emission rate
   estimates based on
   procedures presented in
   Volumes II and III.

-  Obtain meteorological Input
   data based on an on-site
   monitoring program pursuant
   to recommendations
   presented in Volume IV -
   Section 3.4.3.

-  Conduct dispersion modeling
   based on considering ISC as
   the preferred model for
   Superfund APA applications.
Remedial design
(pilot field
studies)
                                                                                                 (Continued)

-------
                                                 TABLE 1. (Continued)
            Source
        Classification
Dispersion Modeling Objectives
     APA Recommendations
    Superfund
    Activities
        Remediation
        source
ro
 i
en
   Provide input to the design
   of air monitoring program
   for this step.

   Provide data on calculated
   concentrations  of air toxic
   contaminants for routine
   and non-routine releases in
   support of protecting
   workers, the public, and
   the environment.

   Provide data as a component
   of the emergency response
   system employed at the site
   to be used together with
   measured concentrations.

   Provide calculated
   concentration data in
   support of protective
   actions during  the remedial
   action activities.
Characterize air
concentrations during
remedial/removal activities:

-  Obtain emission rate
   estimates based on
   procedures presented in
   Volumes II and III.

-  Obtain meteorological input
   data based on an on-site
   monitoring program pursuant
   to recommendations
   presented in Volume IV -
   Section 3.4.3.

-  Conduct dispersion modeling
   based on considering ISC as
   the preferred model for
   Superfund APA applications.

-  Develop/implement a site-
   specific APA emergency
   field guide based on a
   combined monitoring/
   modeling approach to obtain
   near realtime dispersion
   estimates (see example in
   Appendix C).
Remedial actions
(full-scale
operations)
                                                                                                (Continued)

-------
                                                  TABLE 1.  (Continued)
             Source
         Classification
         Post-
         Remediation
         Source
ro
Dispersion Modeling Objectives
     APA Recommendations
    Superfund
    Activities
   Provide air quality data
   base at the site perimeter
   and off-site as a part of
   assessing the effectiveness
   of the remedial action
   implemented.

   Provide air quality data
   base at the site perimeter
   and off-site to demonstrate
   the protection of public
   health and the environment.
Confirm controlled source air
concentrations:

-  Obtain emission rate
   estimates based on
   procedures presented in
   Volumes II and III.

-  Obtain meteorological input
   data based on an on-site
   monitoring program pursuant
   to recommendations
   presented in Volume IV -
   Section 3.0.

-  Conduct dispersion modeling
   based on considering ISC as
   the preferred model for
   Superfund APA applications.
Operation and
maintenance (post-
remedial
activities)

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Atmospheric dispersion modeling for Superfund activities includes a
mix of sources that, in general, are different in configuration and
characteristics from the sources traditionally modeled for air permitting
applications.  The traditional sources modeled for air permitting applications
are usually elevated, buoyant, point sources (e.g., stacks) emitting
combustion products such as sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, carbon dioxide,
and particulate matter.  In contrast, the Superfund activities include mainly
fugitive- area, volume, and line sources, and, to a small extent, point
sources.  A list of the types of sources associated with the various Superfund
activities is presented in Table 2.

          Superfund-area sources generally include landfills, lagoons,
contaminated soil surfaces, and solidification/stabilization operations.
Volume sources include structures within processing facilities, tanks, and
containers.  Line sources include paved and unpaved roads, and point sources
include air strippers, incinerators, and in situ venting operations.  Most
Superfund sources are considered ground-level or near-ground-level, nonbuoyant
releases.

          Superfund activity emissions exhibit more involved and complex
processes that govern the rate and type of air emissions compared with air
emissions from traditionally modeled sources.  Air emissions from Superfund
activities can be continuous or intermittent releases, or a one-time release
over a defined period of time.  The releases can be routine or unforeseen.
Both gaseous and particulate matter emissions must be considered.  The gaseous
emissions include volatile and semi volatile compounds, and particulate matter
emissions include semivolatile, base neutrals, metals and other inorganic
compounds.  Table 1 lists the general type of gaseous and particulate matter
emissions associated with various Superfund activity sources as well as the
anticipated nature of the release.
                                      2-7

-------
TABLE 2.  SOURCES ASSOCIATED WITH SUPERFUND ACTIVITIES AND  THEIR CHARACTERISTICS
Important
Air Emission Mechanisms
Superfund Source
P re-remediation
Sources:
• Landfills
• Lagoons
• Contaminated
soil surfaces
rO
i • Containers
00
• Process
Facilities
• Storage Tanks
Remediation Sources:
• Soil Handling
• Air Stripperb
• Incinerator
Source"
Configuration

Fugitive Area
Fugitive Area
Fugitive Area
Fugitive Area
volume
Fugitive Area
volume line,
point
Fugitive Area

Fugitive Area,
volume
Point, Volume
Point, Volume
Gas Phase

Volatilization,
biodegradation
Volatilization,
biodegradation
Volatilization,
biodegradation
Volatilization.
biodegradation
Volatilization,
combustion
Volatilization

Volatilization
Volatilization
Combustion
Particulate
Phase

Wind Erosion,
mechanical
disturbances
Wind Erosion,
mechanical
disturbances
Wind Erosion
mechanical
disturbances
Mechanical
diturbances
Wind Erosion,
mechanical
disturbances
—

Wind Erosion,
mechanical
disturbances
Combustion
Combustion
Emission
Gas Phase

Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous
Continuous

Continuous,
Intermittent
Continuous,
Intermittent
Continuous,
Intermittent
Mode
Particulate
Phase

Intermittent
Intermittent
Intermittent
Intermittent
Intermittent
—

Intermittent
Continuous
Continuous
Routine/
Non-Routine
Release

Routine
Routine
Routine
Routine
Routine
Routine

Routine/
Non-Routine
Routine/
Non-Rout ine
Routine/
Non-Routine
                                                                                     (Continued)

-------
                                                                TABLE  2.   (Continued)
rv>
 i
vo
Superfund Source
Remediation Sources:
• In-s1tu Venting
• Solidification/
Stabilization
Source*
Configuration
(Continued)
Fugitive Area
Fugitive Area,
volume
Important
Air Emission Mechanisms
Gas Phase

Volatilization
Volatilization
Particulate
Phase

—
Wind Erosion,
mechanical
disturbances
Emission Mode
Particulate
Gas Phase Phase

Continuous
Intermittent
Continuous, Intermittent
Intermittent
Routine/
Non-Routine
Release

Routine/
Non-Routine
Routine/
Non-Routine
Post-remediation Sources:
• Landfills
• Lagoons
•Soil Surfaces
• Containers
Fugitive Area
Fugitive Area
Fugitive Area
Fugitive Area
volume
Volatilization,
biodegradatlon
Volatilization,
biodegradation
Volatilization,
biodegradation
Volatilization,
biodegradation
Wind Erosion,
mechanical
disturbances
Wind Erosion,
mechanical
disturbances
Wind Erosion,
mechanical
disturbances
Mechanical
disturbances
Continuous Intermittent
Continuous Intermittent
Continuous Intermittent
Continuous Intermittent
Routine
Routine
Routine
Routine
           a Most Superfund sources are ground level or near ground  level non-buoyant  releases.


             Small stacks where plume 1s frequently  in the downwash  cavity.

-------
          The factors discussed above clearly imply that many of the currently
employed air dispersion models for traditional  sources,  as outlined in the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Guidelines on Air Quality Models
(Revised) (EPA-450/2-78-027R, July 1986),  have very little application to the
Superfund APA.  Only a limited number of models in the EPA Guidelines are
applicable to Superfund applications.  It is therefore important to define the
sources involved, their configuration, and their characteristics before a
suitable model is selected.

          It can also be concluded that the added complexity of air dispersion
modeling for Superfund activities is mainly associated with estimating
emission rates for the specific source under consideration.  It is therefore
vital to develop emission inventory data for the sources involved based on the
procedures outlined in Volumes II and III of this series for pre-remediation
sources, remediation sources, and post-remediation sources.  It is also
critical to subdivide large-area sources to smaller sources in accordance with
the guidelines provided in this section to provide for a reasonably accurate
simulation of air releases, transport, and dispersion.  Although some of the
emissions from Superfund activities include reactive constituents, they are
handled in this section as passive constituents.  This is a reasonable
approximation because the source-receptor distances involved do not exceed 10
to  15 kilometers and the plume travel time for these distances ranges from
less than 1 hour to 1 or 2 hours.

          The various technical factors discussed above will be further
elaborated on in Sections 2.2 through 2.6.

          The procedures for atmospheric dispersion modeling presented in this
section are based on a five-step process (illustrated in Figure 2):

          t    Step 1 - Collect and review input information;
          •    Step 2 - Select modeling sophistication level;
          t    Step 3 - Develop modeling plan;
          •    Step 4 - Conduct modeling; and
          •    Step 5 - Summarize and evaluate results.

                                      2-10

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Emission Rates
APA Guidelines
Vols. II & III
 COLLECT AND REVIEW INFORMATION

• Source data
• Urban/rural classification
  data and receptor data
• Environmental characteristics
 Available
 Monitoring
    Data
                          SELECT MODEL CLASS AND
                           SOPHISTICATION LEVEL

                          • Screened
                          • Refined
          EPA
        Modeling
       Guidelines
     DEVELOP MODELING  PLAN

 • Select model
 • Select constituents to  be
   modeled
 • Define model input  require-
   ments  (emissions, meteorol-
   ogy, receptors)
 • Select receptors
 • Select modeling period
 • Evaluate  modeling
   uncertainty
  EPA
Review/
Approval
                             CONDUCT MODELING

                  Develop emission inventory
                  Process meteorological data
                  Develop receptor grid
                  Run model test cases
                  Verify input files
                  Perform calculation for averaging times
                  under consideration
                                    I
                        SUMMARIZE/EVALUATE RESULTS

                    •  Determine concentrations
                    •  Prepare meteorological  summaries
                    •  Consider modeling uncertainty
                 Yes
                       ADDITIONAL ANALYSES NEEDED?
                                                     No
                                      Input  to  EPA
                                        Remedial/
                                        Removal
                                        Decision
                                         Making
 Figure 2.  Superfund Air Pathway Analyses Dispersion Modeling  Protocol


                                   2-11

-------
           Additional  technical  discussion on  dispersion modeling  is  found  in
 the EPA's Guidelines  on Air Quality Models.

           The following is  a brief discussion of each of these steps.  An
 expanded  discussion is  presented  in the"subsequent subsections.

           Step 1  - Collect  and  Review  Input Information-This initial step
 addresses the process of collecting and  compiling existing information
 pertinent to  the  air dispersion modeling  based on a literature survey.  It
 includes  obtaining available source, receptor, and environmental data (land
 use  classification, demography, topography, meteorology, and others).  Once
 the  existing  data have  been  collected, compiled, and evaluated, data gaps can
 be defined and a  coherent dispersion modeling plan developed based on
 site-specific requirements.

          Step 2  - Select Modeling  Sophistication Level--This step involves
 selection of  the  dispersion  modeling sophistication level  considering
 screening and  refined modeling  techniques.  This selection process depends on
 program objectives as well as available resource and technical  constraints.
 Screening models  generally use  limited and simplified input information to
 produce a conservative estimate of exposure.  Use of a screening model allows
 for  an initial determination of whether the Superfund site or site activity
will present  an air pathway  problem.  If warranted,  the  emission sources
 should then be evaluated with either a more sophisticated  screening technique
or a refined model.  Technical aspects that should be considered include the
availability of appropriate modeling techniques for the  Superfund list of
toxic constituents.  Modeling approaches should be evaluated  considering site
specific factors,  including  source configuration and characteristics,
applicability, limitations,  performance for similar applications,  and
comparison of advantages and disadvantages of alternative  modeling methods.
                                     2-12

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Step 3 - Develop Modeling PI an--This step involves preparation of a

dispersion modeling plan.  Elements that should be addressed in the plan

include (a) overview of the Superfund site area, (b) selection of constituents

to be modeled, (c) modeling methodology (emission inventory, meteorology,

receptor grid, rural/urban classification, models to be used, concentration

averaging time, and special situations such as wake effects), and (d)

documentation of the air modeling plan.


          Step 4 - Conduct Model ing--This step involves the actual activities

of conducting air dispersion modeling for a Superfund site.  It includes the

following: (a) develop emission inventory, (b) preprocess and verify model

input data (emission inventory, meteorology, receptor grid, and others), (c)

set model switches, (d) run model test cases, (e) perform dispersion

calculations, and (f) obtain printout of modeling input and output.


          Step 5 - Summarize and Evaluate Results--This step involves

reviewing and assessing the dispersion modeling results.  Additional

components of this step should include (a) preparation of data summaries, (b)

concentration mapping (isopleths), (c) estimation of uncertainties, and  (d)

assessment.


2.2       STEP 1 - COLLECT AND REVIEW INPUT INFORMATION


2.2.1     Overview


          The following information, at a minimum, should be collected and

reviewed to support the air modeling program design:


          t    Source data;
          •    Receptor data; and

          •    Environmental data.
                                     2-13

-------
          This type of information serves a dual  purpose: 1) it provides an
overall understanding of site-specific features that can affect dispersion
modeling, and 2) it provides the necessary input  to drive the dispersion
model.  The accuracy of the model predictions depends, of course, on the
accuracy and representativeness of the input data.

          Most of the site-specific information required for Step 1 is
available from the Superfund Remedial  Project Manager/Enforcement Project
Manager (RPM/EPM).  The quality of available information will depend on the
nature and extent of the previously performed studies, but it should generally
improve as the Superfund process progresses.  In  any event, available
information and data should be evaluated for the  following factors:

          t    Data quality objectives (DQO);
          •    Technical soundness of methodologies employed;
          •    Completeness and quality of the data;
          •    Quality assurance/quality control  (QA/QC);
          t    Compatibility, representativeness, and applicability of the
               data; and
          •    Data gaps.

          Supplemental information can be gathered through a literature search
of records and documents from sources such as the following:

          •    National Weather Service;
          •    U.S. Environmental Protection Agency;
          •    State and local agencies;
          •    Contractor studies; and
          •    Other Federal government offices.

          The information collected during Step 1 should be evaluated and the
results documented using a form similar to the example presented in Table 3.
In addition, copies of data summaries should be attached to the form to
provide a convenient, complete documentation package for the project files.
                                     2-14

-------
                       TABLE 3.   EXAMPLE  -  SUPERFUND AIR DISPERSION  MODELING INPUT INFORMATION FORM
Data Tvoe
Source Data
• Site Layout Map
• Contaminants List
• Emission Inventory
• Contaminant Toxicity
Factors
• Off -Site Sources
Receptor Data:
• Population Distribution
Hap
• Identification of
Sensitive Receptors
•Site Work Zones Hap
• Local Land Use
Environmental Data:
• Dispersion Data
- Wind Direction/
Wind Speed
- Atmospheric Stability
• Climatology
- Temperature
- Humidity
- Precipitation
• Topographic Haps
- Site
- Local Area
•Soil and Vegetation
Data
(Yes or No
or N/A)




















pbtained
(Attachment 1)





















Technical
Methods
Employed
Acceptable
(Yes or No)





















Completeness
and Quality
of Data
Acceptable
(Yes or No)




















valuation Fac
QA/QC
Appropriate
(Yes or No)




















ors
Data
Relevant
for this
Application
(Yes or No)





















Data Gaps
Significant
(Yes or No)




















Comments




















ro
                                                                                                           (Continued)

-------
                                                  TABLE 3.  (Continued)
Data Type
Previous APA Data:
• Emission Rate Modeling
• Emission Rate Monitoring
• Dispersion Modeling
• Air Monitoring
• ARAR Summary
Data 

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          The following subsections provide a further discussion of the
various types of data that should be collected during Step 1.

2.2.2     Source Data

          Site-specific Information on the nature and extent of the
contamination is critical for estimating the magnitude of air emissions from
each of the sources and in defining the primary emitted species.  In addition,
information on source configuration is vital.  As discussed in Section 2.1 and
summarized in Table 1, area sources constitute the majority of sources at a
typical Superfund site.  In general, the areas involved range from small
(e.g., a fraction of an acre) to large (tens of acres), and their division by
source characteristics and size can be critical to the success of this
modeling analysis.  The data should be available from the Superfund RPM/EPM.
Specific information that should be collected, evaluated, and prepared as
input into the dispersion model includes:

          •    Number and type of sources at the site and their locations
               based on past site activities and information on the extent of
               contamination.  (Example sources are  lagoons, drainage
               ditches, landfills,  processing facilities, incinerators, air
               strippers, and roads.)   The temporal and spatial variability of
               these sources should also be addressed.  Source variability is
               an extremely important  consideration for Superfund APAs.  In
               particular,  emission/source conditions during remediation can
               vary significantly.

          t    Configuration and classification (based on information
               presented in Table 2 and site-specific considerations) of
               sources as area, volume, line,  or point sources.
                                     2-17

-------
Dimensions t)f each area, volume,  and line source,  including the
shape of sources (e.g., is the area source a rectangle,
triangle, or other shape, does the line source constitute a
straight or curved line) and the  portions of a line source that
do not have emissions.  Nonsquare-area sources have to be
approximated by a square for use  in the dispersion model.  If
the square covers a large area, it may be advisable to
subdivide it into smaller squares if calculated concentrations
are required at short distances from the source.  Similarly
nonregular-volume sources have to be approximated by a cube and
nonregular-shaped-line sources have to be approximated by
minimizing the curvatures involved.

Stack parameters, including stack height, exit diameter, exit
velocity, and exit temperature for point sources.

Contaminants associated with each source area.  It will be
useful to subdivide the contaminants into groups and subgroups
with similar chemical or physical characteristics: organics
(volatiles, semivolatiles, base neutrals, pesticides,
polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs)), and inorganics (metals and
other toxic compounds [H2S, HCN,  etc]).

Physical and chemical characteristics of the contaminants
involved, including density relative to air (for gaseous
emissions) and particle size distribution (for particulate
matter emissions).

Estimated typical long-term emission rates and typical as well
as maximum short-term emission rates for each source under
consideration.  The emphasis for Superfund APAs is to define,
as practical, realistic source input data for dispersion
modeling purposes.  For Superfund APA applications, the
uncertainties associated with the input data as well as the
accuracy of the dispersion model are considered during the data
                      2-18

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
               evaluation stage.  This is different from air quality

               permitting applications for traditional sources, which are

               generally based on conservative source emission assumptions.

               The methods to estimate emission rates for various undisturbed

               and disturbed sources at a Superfund site are presented in

               Volume II and III, repectively, of this document.


          Table 4 represents an example of input requirements for various

source categories.  As noted in Section 2.1, in contrast to conventional air

emission sources that are considered mainly as point sources, Superfund

sources consist mainly of area, volume, and line sources.  Only a limited

number of cases include point sources, mainly during remedial cleanup

activities.  It is therefore important to define the source configuration and

to best approximate its shape to the shape acceptable by the employed

dispersion model.


2.2.3     Receptor Data


          Receptor data that correspond to data used for the Superfund risk

assessment process should be identified.  These data will provide the basis

for specifying a calculational (receptor) grid for Superfund APA dispersion

modeling application.


          Specific receptor information that should be collected and evaluated

before the selection of the receptor grid includes the following:


          •    Population distribution by 22.5-degree sectors in 2-kilometer

               increments for a distance of 10 kilometers from the site if

               total risk is to be considered;


          •    Sensitive receptors within 10 kilometers of the site and

               individual residences and buildings within 1 kilometer of the

               site;
                                     2-19

-------
     TABLE 4.   EXAMPLE OF INPUT REQUIREMENTS  FOR  VARIOUS  SOURCE  CATEGORIES
Input
Parameter
Source
Location
Source Cateaorv
Point Line Area
Coordinates Coordinates Coordinates
of the point of the center of the sciuth-
(m). of the line west corner
(m). of the area
approximated
by a square
(m).

Vol ume
Coordinates
of the center
of the source
(m).
Source
Dimension
Source
Emission Rate
for each
constituent
under con-
sideration.
Adjacent
Obstructions
Initial
Dilution
Particle mass-
size distri-
bution and
deposition
velocity.
Stack height
(m), exit
diameter (m),
exit velocity
(m/sec), exit
temperature
CK)

Mass per unit
time.
Length (m),
Width (m),
Height (m).
Width of the
square area
source (m).
Mass per unit
time per unit
length, or
mass per unit
time if sim-
ulated by an
array of vol-
ume sources.
Mass per unit
time per unit
area.
Height of the
volume source
(m), width
(m).
Mass per unit
time.
Height (m),
Width (m),
Length (m).
                Initial
                horizontal
                and vertical
                dimensions
                (m).
                Initial
                horizontal
                and vertical
                dimensions
                (m).
                 Initial
                 horizontal
                 and vertical
                 dimensions
Fraction of mass in each size group.   Average deposition
velocity for each mass size group (m/sec).
                                     2-20

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          0    Site work zones as identified in the Health and Safety Plan;

               and


          t    Local land use characterization (e.g., residential, commercial)

               within 3 kilometers of the site.


          Sensitive receptor locations include schools and hospitals

associated with sensitive population segments, as well as locations where

sensitive environmental flora and fauna exist, including parks, monuments, and

forests.


2.2.4     Environmental Characteristics


          Information on environmental characteristics pertinent to a

Superfund site is a necessary component for defining air pathway exposure

potential.  In the case of dispersion modeling, the environmental charac-

teristics serve as key input to the modeling calculations.  Environmental

characteristics that should be evaluated prior to the implementation of air

dispersion modeling may include:


          •    Climate (historical summaries from available onsite and offsite

               sources)

                    Annual and monthly or seasonal wind roses,

                    Annual and monthly or seasonal tabular summaries of mean

                    wind speeds and atmospheric stability distributions,

                    Annual and monthly or seasonal tabular summaries of

                    temperature and precipitation;


          t    Meteorological  survey results

                    Hourly listing of all meteorological  parameters for the

                    entire monitoring period,

                    Daytime wind rose (at coastal  or complex terrain sites),

                    Nightime wind rose (at coastal or complex terrain sites),

                    Summary wind rose for all hours,
                                     2-21

-------
          Summary of dispersion conditions for the monitoring period
          (joint frequency distributions of wind direction versus
          wind speed category and stability class frequencies),
          Tabular summaries of means and extremes for temperature
          and other meteorological  parameters;

•    Definition of soil  conditions  (for landfills and contaminated
     soil surfaces)
          Narrative of soil characteristics (e.g., temperature,
          porosity and organic matter content),
          Characterization of soil  contamination conditions (e.g.,
          in waste piles);

•    Definition of site-specific terrain and nearby receptors

          Topographic map of the area within 10 kilometers of the
          site (U.S. Geological Survey 7.5-minute quadrangle sheets
          are acceptable),
          Maps that indicate the location of the nearest residence
          for each of the sixteen 22.5-degree sectors that
          correspond major compass  points (e.g., north,  north-
          northwest), nearest population centers, and sensitive
          receptors schools, hospitals and nursing homes);

•    Maps showing the topography of the area, the location of the
     units of concern, and the location of meteorological  monitoring
     equipment;

•    A narrative description of the meteorological conditions during
     the air sampling periods, including qualitative descriptions of
     weather events and precipitation, which are needed for data
     interpretation; and

•    Sensitive environmental areas  (e.g., wildlife preserves, parks,
     etc.).
                           2-22

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
           In searching for meteorological  data,  it is important to consider

the following factors:


          t    Meteorological data drive the dispersion model  and govern the

               advection and dispersion of contaminants released from a

               source.  It is therefore important to utilize data that are

               considered representative of the site area and vicinity.


          •    The length of record for the data base should be considered to

               avoid a potential bias in the dispersion calculations.  A

               minimum of 1 year of data are required to run most refined

               dispersion models, with 5 years being preferred.  If long-term

               risk is the issue a meterological  data period longer than 5

               years may be desireable to characterize the expected exposure

               period.


          Onsite meteorological monitoring is recommended as a part of the

Superfund project planning phase.  Although data collected from an onsite

meteorological station may not have the long record required for their direct

use in dispersion calculation, their benefits are substantial  because they

contain site-specific data:


          •    To assess the correlation with offsite meteorological data and

               the applicability of the offsite data to the site under

               consideration;


          •    To show the diurnal variation of the meteorological parameters

               affecting plume advection and dispersion; and


          t    To indicate any topography-induced flow, including drainage and

               valley flows and the effect of water bodies on wind flow,

               including coastal zone flow.
                                     2-23

-------
          Therefore, It Is recommended that an onsite meteorological
monitoring program be initiated immediately after a site is included on the
National Priorities List (NPL) if representative data are not available from
the National Weather Service.  (In general, National Weather Service data will
be representative of site conditions for simple, flat-terrain settings.)  The
meteorological monitoring program should continue throughout the post-NPL
phases.  Elements of an onsite meteorological program (e.g., recommendations
on the number and siting of meteorological stations) for a Superfund site are
discussed in Section 3.4.3 of this volume, along with references for siting
guidelines.

          Meteorological and climatological data available from a National
Weather Service (NWS) station or other suitable offsite source should be
utilized (e.g. stability array [STAR] meteorological summaries).  From a
practical viewpoint, NWS data should be considered in most applications, since
such data are subject to reasonable QA/QC programs and are processed by the
National Climatic Center for use in dispersion models.  Data available from
state or industrial facilities should be evaluated for their applicability,
the availability of parameters needed for input into the dispersion
calculations, and the associated QA/QC programs.  In any event, meteorological
and climatological data should be obtained from a station that is considered
representative of the general dispersion characteristics of the site.  Factors
such as proximity, topography, the existence of water bodies, and urban/rural
influences should be considered in assessing the applicability of the
meteorological data to the site under consideration.

          Data available from the NWS are collected from either 7- or 10-meter
towers.  These heights are considered applicable for most Superfund low-level
sources.  Data from NWS stations are also applicable to the potential elevated
releases, either directly or through the use of wind power law profiles.

          Table 5 provides a summary of meteorological data for use in
dispersion modeling for Superfund APAs.
                                     2-24

-------
1
1


1

1












1














1




1

1





TABLE 5. A SUMMARY OF INPUT METEOROLOGICAL DATA FOR USE IN DISPERSION
MODELING FOR SUPERFUND
Input Meteorolooical Data

I. Superfund Step: RI/FS, Remedial
Design, Operation and
Maintenance.
• Hourly average wind speed;

• Hourly average wind
direction;

• Hourly average atmospheric
stability;

• Minimum and maximum daily
mixing heights;

• Hourly ambient temperature.
II. Superfund Step: Remedial Action
A. Routine Releases
• Hourly average wind speed;

• Hourly average wind
direction;

• Hourly average atmospheric
stability;

• Hourly ambient temperature;
• Estimated mixing height.

B. Non-Routine Releases
• 15-min. average wind speed;
• 15-min. average wind
direction;

• 15-min. average atmospheric
stability;
• 15-min ambient temperature;
• Estimated mixing height.




APAs
Source


•


• NWS


• State


• Industrial
Facilities
(on-site)








On-Site
Meteorological
Program







On-Site
Meteorological
Program




2-25


Lenath of Record





• One year minimum.


• Five years
preferred, (a
longer data set may
be appropriate
depending on the
potential exposure
period).








N/A









N/A








-------
          Topographic features and water bodies can affect the dispersion and
transport of airborne toxic constituents.  It is therefore important to
understand local wind flows and to identify areas with topography and/or water
bodies that might influence the dispersion and transport of constituents
released from the site.  For example, a site located downs!ope of an elevated
terrain feature might be affected by diurnal drainage flows.  Terrain heights
relative to release heights will affect ground-level concentrations.  Terrain
obstacles such as hills and mountains can divert regional winds.  Valleys can
channel wind flows and also limit horizontal dispersion.  In addition, complex
terrain can result in the development of local diurnal wind circulations and
affect wind speed, atmospheric turbulence, and stability conditions.  Although
difficult to model, such situations should be recognized and quantified to the
extent possible as part of the dispersion modeling analysis.  Topographic maps
of the facility and adjacent areas are needed to assess local and regional
terrain.  The utility of an on-site meteorological program also becomes
apparent in these situations.

          Large water bodies can also affect atmospheric stability conditions
and the dispersion of air contaminants.  In general, large water bodies tend
to increase the stability of the atmosphere in the air layer adjacent to the
water, thus reducing the dispersion of air contaminants.  Local diurnal wind
patterns may also be present seasonally at coastal locations.  Again, onsite
meteorological  data can be used to identify and characterize these local wind
patterns.

          Soil  characteristics and conditions can influence emission rates of
volatile species from Superfund sites and have a large impact on the wind
erosion of contaminated surface soils.  It is important when considering
particulate matter emissions to understand soil conditions such as porosity,
silt content, particle size distribution, soil type, and source data.

          Surface obstructions, including structures,  trees, and vegetation,
could affect air flow by generating wake effects or increasing plume
dispersion due to surface roughness.   It is therefore important to obtain
pertinent information for use in the dispersion modeling.

                                     2-26

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2.5      Previous APA Data


           Previous air quality data that address calculated air concentrations

of contaminants known to exist at the site can provide insight into existing

levels of  air toxic compounds of interest.  Compound-specific information will

be useful  in assessing what indicator compounds should be modeled and what

modeling methodologies should be employed.  Site-specific Superfund documents

(e.g., site investigations (Sis), RI/FSs, records of decision (RODs), etc.)

should be  reviewed to identify available APA information.


           Results of existing dispersion calculations should be evaluated for

acceptability and representativeness before use.  Factors to be evaluated
include:


           •    Dispersion modeling techniques employed.  These include

               modeling sophistication level (i.e., screening or refined).


           •    Input data used in the modeling, including emission inventory,

               meteorology, and receptor grid.


           •    Assumptions used to develop the input data base,  the quality of

               data used, and their applicability to the case under

               consideration.


           •    Number of compounds modeled for and the assumptions involved.


           t    The assessed quality of the dispersion modeling analysis.


           Existing air monitoring data for the site area can be  used in

designing the receptor grid and selecting compounds to be modeled.   These data

can also be used in evaluating the performance of dispersion modeling by

comparing calculated with measured air concentrations.   Most importantly, they
can provide insight on existing background concentrations.
                                     2-27

-------
2.3       STEP 2 - SELECT MODELING SOPHISTICATION LEVEL

2.3.1     Overview

          Selection of the dispersion modeling sophistication level and model
is the cornerstone for a meaningful Superfund APA.  Coupled with the
sophistication level is the applicability of the model  to the site and
activity involved and the model's ability to reasonably simulate transport and
dispersion of air toxic contaminants from the sources involved.  The
appropriate model sophistication, applicability, and capabilities will depend
on the following factors:

          t    Source-specific APA recommendations presented in Volume I;

          t    Superfund dispersion modeling objectives;

          •    Data quality objectives for the dispersion modeling activities;

          •    Input data from Step 1;

          •    Legal and liability aspects of the Superfund project; and

          t    Pragmatic aspects of the program

                    Availability of good quality input data and the
                    constraints involved,
                    Applicability of existing dispersion models to
                    site-specific characteristics,
                    Ability of emissions models to adequately simulate
                    emission rates and variability,
                    Ability of existing dispersion models to reasonably
                    simulate the transport and dispersion of air toxic
                    contaminants released from the site, considering physical
                    and chemical factors and processes involved,
                                     2-28

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                    Ability to accomplish the dispersion modeling objectives
                    with modest uncertainties, and the availability of the
                    required resources.

          Source-specific APA recommendations have been presented in Volume I.
These recommendations are based on a standard sequence of APAs.  The APA
strategy is based on the premise that initially a screening APA should be
conducted.  The need for a refined APA is then determined based on an
evaluation of screening results considering the potential to exceed health
criteria and modeling inaccuracies.

          The dispersion modeling objectives for specific Superfund activities
(e.g., RI/FS, remedial action) are also important input for the selection of
modeling sophistication levels.  These activity-specific objectives have been
summarized in Table 1.  Input from the RPM/EPM should be obtained to confirm
site-specific dispersion modeling objectives and to ensure that the dispersion
modeling level selected is consistent with these objectives.

          The availability of appropriate meteorological data is probably the
most significant factor when selecting the modeling sophistication level.
Synthesized meterological data are generally limited to screening modeling
while actual meterological data are appropriate for screening applications.

2.3.2     Selection of Models as a Function of Sophistication Levels

          Air dispersion models are employed in a wide range of air quality
studies to provide spatial and temporal  fields of calculated concentrations
due to air emissions from various existing and proposed sources.  The
calculated concentrations are used to fill data gaps generated by air
monitoring programs that cannot provide measured concentrations at a large
number of locations.  Dispersion models provide a concentration field based on
the use of a large number of receptors and consideration of a wide range of
scenarios.  As such, air dispersion models serve as a vital  tool 1n assessing
compliance with regulations for existing and proposed sources.   They also are
used extensively in the regulatory development process.

                                     2-29

-------
          The air dispersion models utilized in air regulatory studies can
conveniently be grouped into four classes:  Gaussian, numerical, statistical
or empirical, and physical.  Of these four classes, the Gaussian models are
the most widely used because of their simple formulation, ease of
understanding, and their ability to simulate the transport and dispersion of
air contaminants for a large number of applications.  Most of the Gaussian
dispersion models employed in air quality studies are point source models.
They are the dominant tools in all air regulatory applications, as noted in
the EPAs Guidelines on Air Quality Models.  The bases of the four classes of
models are:

          t    Gaussian models are based on the assumption that plume
               dispersion in the crosswind and vertical directions follows a
               Gaussian distribution in a uniform wind field.  They are
               analytical solutions to the continuity equation.

          t    Numerical  models include the continuity, momentum, and energy
               conservation equations that are solved numerically using
               various techniques.  Plume transport can be in a uniform or
               nonuniform wind field.  These models require extensive input
               and substantial computer and manpower resources, but may be
               helpful in the presence of obstructions in the wind field.

          •    Statistical  or empirical  models incorporate factors and modules
               that are based on experimental  data.  Such models can be very
               site-specific and may not be applicable to most of the
               Superfund  sites and associated activities.

          t    Physical models are based on the use of wind tunnels or other
               fluid (e.g., water, oil)  modeling facilities.   They require
               major resources and are applicable for extremely difficult
               situations that require laboratory simulations.  From a
               practical  viewpoint, these models may not be applicable to
               Superfund  APAs.
                                     2-30

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Of these four classes of models, Gaussian dispersion models are by

far the most commonly used in air quality assessments.  As discussed in

Sections 2.1 and 2.2.2, the majority of Superfund sources are area sources,

followed by line and volume sources.  Only very few sources, mainly those

present during the remedial action step, are classified as point sources.

Gaussian dispersion models can and have been successfully applied to the types

of sources encountered at Superfund sites; but the number of applicable models

is limited.


          Alternative modeling sophistication levels for Superfund APA

applications can be classified as either:


          •    Screening models; or

          •    Refined models.


          Screening dispersion models are applicable mainly for the screening

step of the RI/FS.  Their applicability and utility for any of the other

Superfund activities are very limited.  Screening analyses are based on

conservative assumptions and/or input data.  Therefore, screening modeling

results provide conservative estimates of air quality impacts for a specific

source.  Screening dispersion models eliminate the need for further detailed

modeling if they show that the impact on air quality does not pose a risk to

public health and the environment.  If results of screening dispersion

calculations indicate a potential risk to public health and the environment, a

refined modeling APA is warranted.


          Table 6 provides a summary of screening dispersion modeling

techniques applicable to Superfund APAs.  The modeling techniques are based on

EPA Guidelines and Workbooks for dispersion modeling developed for similar

applications.  The references for the modeling techniques are also included in

Table 6.  From Table 6, it is apparent that most of the screening modeling

techniques apply to point sources.  Such models can be used in screening

analysis to approximate other source configurations, such as area sources, but
                                     2-31

-------
                      TABLE  6.   A SUMMARY OF  DISPERSION  MODELING SCREENING TECHNIQUES FOR SUPERFUND APAs
Feature
1. Source Configuration:
Point
Line
Area
Volume
2. Release Mode:
Continuous
Instantaneous
3. Contaminant Physical State:
Gas
Part leu late
4. Wake Effect
5. Down wash
6. Heavier than Air Gas Module
7. Number of Sources Handled
8. Concentration Averaging Time

9. Gormen ts











Screening Modeling Technique
Screening Procedure
for Estimating
the Air Quality
Impact of
Stationary Sources,
(PA. August 1988)

Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Single
1, 3, and 24-hours,
annual
This document contains
formulas and a large
number of nomoqrams for
normalized concentra-
tions thai are useful
for simple screening
calculations. A
computerized version of
this technique is in the
form of the PTPLU-2
model.

A
Workbook of Screening
Techniques for
Assessing Impacts
Toxic A1r Pollutants
USEPA. March 1988

Yes
No
Yes
Yes

Yes-
Yes2

Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes2
Single
Various Averaging
Times
This document contains
formulas for screening
hand calculations.
Also included are
examples of .
calculations.






Workbook of
Atmospheric
Dispersion
Estimates
D. Bruce Turner,
1969

Yes
Yes
Yes
No

Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Single
Various Averaging
Times
This document
contains formulas
and a large number
of nomograms for
normalized concen-
trations that are
useful for simple
screening calcula-
tions. Also
included are
examples of
calculations.
Rapid Assessment of
Exposure to Particulate
Emissions From Surface
Contamination Sites,
USEPA. September 1984

No
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

No
Yes
No
No
No
Single
24-hour and annual

This document provides
a methodology for
screening estimates of
air concentrations
from surface releases
from Superfund Sites.






ISC
Dispersion Model
(screening mode)

Yes2
Yes2
Yes2
Yes2

Yes2
No

Yes2
Yes2
Yes2
Yes2
No
Multiple2
1, 3, 8, and 24-
hours and annual
The ISC dispersion
model combines
various dispersion
algorithms into 'a
set of two com-
puter programs
that can be used
to assess the air
quality Impacts of
emissions from a
wide variety of
sources .
OJ
ro
           These guidelines Include a computerized model SCREEN which carries out the screening calculations.

          O
           Preferred technique when applicable.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the calculations involved become tedious and subject to calculational errors.
The preferred screening techniques, when applicable, for Superfund APA
applications are based on the use of ISC in a screening mode and supplemented,
as necessary by those stipulated in A Workbook of Screening Techniques for
Assessing Impacts of Toxic Air Pollutants (U.S. EPA, 1988).

          Refined dispersion models utilize analytical techniques that provide
more detailed treatment of the physical and chemical atmospheric processes,
more detailed and precise input data, and more specialized concentration
estimates than the screening techniques.  These models consist of computerized
codes and can handle a massive volume of input data (e.g., several years of
hourly meteorological data).  Refined models generally provide more accurate
estimates of the impact of Superfund sources on public health and the
environment by relying on fewer assumptions and providing a consistent means
of making repetitious and involved calculations without error.  Frequently the
conduct of a refined dispersion modeling analysis will involve a refined
screening modeling as a preliminary step.  The purpose of the refined
screening modeling is to identify locations of high concentration using a
relatively dense calculational grid network.  Thus, the refined modeling
analysis can be conducted in a cost-effective manner by limiting the
calculational grid points to those which characterize actual receptor
locations and high concentration areas of concern on a site-specific basis.
Frequently, the same model can be used for both the refined screening and
refined modeling analyses.  Further reference to refined modeling APAs in
Section 2 is based on this two-step process which includes the conduct of a
refined screening analysis, as warranted.

          Refined dispersion modeling provides the user with high flexibility
by accommodating multiple sources and providing a concentration field for
varied time averages at a large number of receptors, none of which could be
obtained from hand calculations using screening methodologies.  Table 7
provides a summary of refined dispersion models applicable for Superfund APAs.
                                     2-33

-------
TABLE 7.  A SUMMARY OF DISPERSION MODELING REFINED TECHNIQUES FOR
           SUPERFUND APAs
Model inq Technique

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Feature
Source Configuration:
Point
Line
Area
Volume
Release Mode:
Continuous
Instantaneous
Contaminant Physical State:
Gas
Parti cul ate
Wake Effect
Downwash
Heavier than Air Gas Module
Number of Sources Handled
ISC
Dispersion
Model1*
Yes*
No
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
No
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
Yes*
No
Multiple
PAL DS Model1
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Multiple
Inpuff2
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Single
DEGADIS3
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes*
Single
                                                            (Continued)
                               2-34

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                             TABLE 7. (Continued)
                                              Modeling Technique
           Feature
   ISC
Dispersion
  Model1*   PAL  DS Model1   Inpuff2   DEGADIS3
8. Number of Meteorological
   Towers
 Single
9. Concentration Averaging Time  1,3,8, and
                                  24-hour,
                                   annual

10. Applicability to Superfund
    Activities                   All steps
 Single

1 through
24 hours
              All steps
Multiple  Multiple

 Hourly
            Remedial
            Action
            Step
          Remedial
          Action
          Step and
          selected
          use for
          other
          steps.
1 Include in the EPA Guideline on Air Quality Models (Revised),  July 1986;
  ISC • Industrial Source Complex;  PAL DS - Point, Area, and Line Source
  Dispersion Deposition.

2 USEPA INPUFF - A single source Gaussian Puff Dispersion Algorighm - Users
  Guide;  INPUFF - Integrated Puff.

3 US EPA,  Dispersion Model  for Evaluating Dense Gas JEt Chemical  Releases,
  Volume 1 and 2, April, 1988; DEGADIS = Dense Gas Dispersion.

* Preferred technique when applicable.
                                     2-35

-------
          The Industrial Source Complex (ISC) dispersion model and the Point,
Area, and Line Dispersion Deposition (PAL DS) model are included in the EPAs
Guideline on Air Quality Models.  The ISC dispersion and PAL DS models are
applicable to continuous sources with several configurations, while the
MESOPUFF model is applicable to instantaneous, continuous, and time-dependent
releases and can handle point and area sources generally on a larger scale
than most Superfund applications.  Of these three, the ISC dispersion model is
the preferred model for most applications and should be given first
consideration as the model of choice for use in the Superfund APA for the
RI/FS, remedial  design, and operation and maintenance activities.  It can be
augmented as required under non-routine air releases by the use of the
MESOPUFF II, Integrated Puff (INPUFF), or Dense Gas Dispersion (DEGADIS)
models if special air release situations exist that could be simulated by any
of these models.

          The ISC dispersion model should also be given first consideration as
the model of choice under the remedial action activities to simulate routine
air releases.  A model like the INPUFF or the procedure outlined in Appendix C
should be utilized under nonroutine air releases.

          In this respect, the ISC dispersion model can be considered the
default air dispersion model for Superfund APA applications.  (The ISCLT model
is also included in the EPAs Graphical Exposure Modeling System, which is
standard for use in conducting Superfund risk assessments.,)

          The PAL DS model may also be useful for estimating short-term
impacts.  It has a good area source treatment and it is expected to be more
accurate than the ISC model for receptors immediately downwind of an area
source.  Furthermore, PAL DS has a more complete deposition algorithm than
ISC, but it contains no downwash algorithm.
                                     2-36

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          The iNPUFF and the DEGADIS models were Included for handling

instantaneous releases, with the DEGADIS model having the capability to handle

heavier-than-air gases.  These two models could be useful as a part of the

remedial action step on a case-by-case basis to augment EPA's A Workbook of

Screening Techniques for Assessing Impacts of Toxic Air Pollutants.


2.4       STEP 3 - DEVELOP MODELING PLAN


2.4.1     Overview


          A dispersion modeling plan should be developed for each Superfund

APA application.  The objective of the plan is to document the modeling

methods, input data requirements and modeling output and use, consistent with

the APA objectives and the dispersion modeling DQO. The plan also provides an

opportunity for peer review and RPM/EPM approval of the modeling program.

Developing a modeling plan involves the following major elements:


          t    Select constituents to be modeled;

          •    Define emission inventory methodology;

          •    Define meteorological  data base;

          •    Design receptor grid;

          t    Detail modeling methodology;

          •    Estimate background concentrations;

          •    Define dispersion calculations to be performed; and
          •    Document modeling plan.


          Major input to the development of the dispersion modeling plan

should include the information collected under Step 1 (Collect and review

input information) and Step 2 (Select modeling sophistication level.)


          Procedures for development  of a dispersion modeling plan are

provided in the subsections that follow.  Table 8 provides an outline for the

modeling plan.  Each of the major elements of the modeling plan is discussed

in the following subsections.
                                     2-37

-------
   TABLE 8.  AN OUTLINE  FOR THE DISPERSION MODELING PLAN I:OR A SUPERFUND APA
I.    INTRODUCTION
     t    General site background (site location,  topography,  nearby water
          bodies, demography, vegetation,  general  site activities).

II.  DISPERSION MODELING DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES
     t    Modeling objectives (consistent  with the Superfund activity involved
          and the overall project objective);
     t    Overall rationale for the modeling approach; and
     •    Modeling uncertainties and their implications to the Superfund APA.

III.  CONSTITUENTS TO BE MODELED

IV.  EMISSION INVENTORY
     •    Sources to be modeled (number, configuration (i.e.,  point, line,
          area volume) locations);
     •    Source characteristics (constituents involved);
     t    Methods for estimating emissions (see Volumes II and III);
     •    Content of the emission inventory database  (see  Table 2-4);
     •    Particle size distribution;
     •    Physical and chemical  properties of constituents to  be modeled;  and
     0    Dimensions of obstructions.

V.    METEOROLOGICAL DATA
          Source of meteorological data;
          Length of record;
          Parameters to be utilized in the dispersion modeling;  and
          Quality of the data.
          Representativeness of data.

                                                                   (Continued)
                                     2-38

-------
I
I
•                                    TABLE 8.  (Continued)
•       VI.  RECEPTOR GRID

              •    On-site Receptors  (number and locations);
              •    Perimeter  Receptors  (number and locations);
•            •    Off-site Receptors

                         Regular  (number and locations);

|                 -     Extra locations In potential high concentration areas  (number
                         and locations);  and

•                 -     Environmentally sensitive locations  (number and locations).


•       VII. MODELING METHODOLOGY

              •    Selected model(s)  and rationale;

I            •    Model  application  to the Superfund activity APA;

              •    Model  features:
•                 -     Rural/urban classification,
•                 -     Wake  and/or downwash effects,
                         Particle  deposition,
I                         Plume rise,
                         Dispersion parameters;

_            •    Setting of model switches; and

•            •    Testing the model  against bench mark test cases.


I       VIII. ESTIMATED BACKGROUND CONCENTRATIONS


|       XI.  DISPERSION CALCULATIONS

              t    Averaging  times;
•            •    Data  summaries (tabular, graphical);
•            0    Comparison with guideline values; and
              t    Input to the risk  assessment.


         X.   REFERENCES
I       	

I
•                                            2-39

-------
2.4.2     Dispersion Modeling Data Quality Objectives

          The purpose of this section is to outline the main objectives of the
dispersion modeling as a part of the Superfund APA and how to meet them.  It
should address applicable or relevant and appropriate requirements (ARARs) for
each of the Superfund activities and the level of air dispersion modeling that
is necessary to provide adequate input into the Superfund APA.

          Elements included in this section should address:

          t    The overall rationale for the modeling approach;

          t    Model output and anticipated uncertainties,, considering input
               data, model formulation and assumptions involved, and output;
               and

          •    Implications of model uncertainties on the Superfund APA (e.g.,
               are they acceptable).

          In this respect, dispersion modeling DQOs provide consistency in
selection of the modeling tool, modeling input (emission inventory,
meterological and other data) and output, and in the overall requirements of
the air dispersion modeling for the specific application under consideration.

2.4.3     Select Modeling Constituents

          Selection of air toxics compounds for dispersion modeling is
generally less critical than for air monitoring.  Selection of air monitoring
compounds is significantly limited by technical, budget, and schedule
constraints.  However, dispersion modeling results from one target contaminant
for a particular source can generally be scaled to obtain, on a cost-effective
basis, concentrations for numerous other contaminants of interest.
                                     2-40

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          A list of the compounds included in the Hazardous Substances List
(HSL) developed by EPA for the Superfund program is presented in Table 9.
This list is a composite of the Target Compound List (TCL) for organics and
Target Analyte List (TAL) for inorganics.  Table 9 also includes examples for
additional potential Superfund air emission constituents (e.g., HCN, H2S,
HC1).  Therefore, Table 9 represents a comprehensive initial list of target
compounds for air dispersion modeling.

          Emission rates should be estimated prior to the conduct of
dispersion studies.  These results, as well as dispersion modeling results (as
available), should be used to identify appropriate site and source-specific
modeling contaminants from Table 9.  In addition, contaminants included in
ARARs identified during Step 1 should also be used to identify candidate
modeling contaminants.

          Dispersion modeling for screening applications should include all
site/source-specific contaminants.

          Dispersion modeling target compounds (i.e. indicator compounds) for
refined APAs should, at a minimum, include all contaminants with
concentrations greater than or equal to 10 percent of the appropriate health-
based action level.  These contaminants are expected to represent the greatest
contributors to potential health impacts.  This approach provides a practical
basis to address refined modeling APAs at sites with a large number of
potential emission compounds (e.g., over one hundred) of which only a limited
subset significantly affect inhalation exposure estimates.  However, it is
generally recommended, as practical, to also evaluate all appropriate
site/source-specific contaminants for refined modeling APAs (especially if the
cumulative effect due to exposure to a mixture of constituents is used for
comparison to health criteria).

          The dispersion modeling target compounds list should be reevaluated,
and revised if warranted, based on monitoring results.
                                     2-41

-------
 TABLE  9.   CLASSIFICATION OF ORGANIC AND  INORGANIC COMPOUNDS FOR AMBIENT AIR
            MODELING STUDIES
Contaminant Type
Compound Class
Representative Compounds
Volatile Orqanics    Aromatics
                     Halogenated Species
                     Oxygenated Species




                     Sulfur-Containing Species

                     Nitrogen-Containing Species
                          benzene
                          toluene
                          ethyl benzene
                          total  xylenes
                          styrene
                          chlorobenzene

                          carbon tetrachloride
                          chlorofrom
                          methylene chloride
                          chlorornethane
                          1,2-dichloropropane
                          trans-1,3-dichloropropene
                          cis-l,3-dichloropropene
                          bromoform
                          bromomethane
                          bromodichloromethane
                          di bromochloromethane
                          1,1,2,2-tetrachloroethane
                           ,1,1-trichloroethane
                           ,1,2-trichloroethane
                           ,1-dichloroethane
                          1,2-dichloroethane
                          chlroethane
                          tetrachloroethene
                          trichloroethene
                          1,2-dichloroethene
                          1,1-dichloroethene
                          1,2-dichloroethene
                          vinyl  chloride

                          actone
                          2-butanone
                          2-hexanone
                          4-methyl-2-pentanone

                          carbon disulfide

                          benzonltrile*
                                                   1,.
                                                   i,:
                                                   i,:
                                                                  (Continued)
                                     2-42

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                             TABLE 9.  (Continued)
Contaminant Type
    Compound Class
Representative Compounds
Volatile Inorganics  Acid Gases
Semi-Volatile
Orqanics
Phenols
                     Esters
                     Chlorinated Benzenes
                     Amines
                              hydrogen cyanide*
                              hydrochloric acid*
                     Sulfur-Containing Species     hydrogen sulfide*
phenol
2-methyl phenol
4-methylphenol
2,4-dimethylphenol
2-chlorophenol
2,4-dichlorophenol
2,4,5-trichlorophenol
2,4,6-trichlorophenol
pentachlorophenol
4-chloro-3-methylphenol
2-nitrophenol
4-nitrophenol
2,4-dinitrophenol
4,6-dinitro-2-methylphenol

bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate
di-n-octyl phthalate
di-n-butyl phthalate
diethyl phthalate
butyl benzyl phthalate
dimethyl phthalate
vinyl acetate

1,2-dichlorobenzene
1,3-dichlorobenzene
1,4-dichlorobenzene
1,2,4-trichlorobenzene
hexachlorobenzene
nitrobenzene
2,6-dinitrotoluene
2,4-dinitrotoluene
3,3'-dichlorobenzidine

n-nitrosodimethylamine
n-nitrosodi-n-propylamine
n-nitrosodiphenylamine
aniline
2-nitroaniline
3-nitroaniline
4-nitroaniline
4-chloroaniline

               (Continued)
                                       2-43

-------
                             TABLE 9. (Continued)
Contaminant Type
    Compound Class
Representative Compounds
Semi-Volatile
Organics (cont.)
Ethers
                     Alkadienes
                     Miscellaneous Aliphatics
                     and Aromatics
                     Polynuclear Aromatic
                     Hydrocarbons (PAHs)
                     Pesticides
bis(2-chloroethyl)ether
bi s(2-chloroi sopropyl)ether
bromophenyl-phenylether
4-chlorophenyl-phenylether

hexachlorobutadiene
hexachlorocyclopentad i ene

benzole acid
benzyl alcohol
bi s(2-chloroethoxy)methane
dibenzofuran
hexachloroethane
isophorone

acenaphthene
acenaphthylene
benzo(a)anthracene
benzo(b)fluoranthene
benzo (k.) f 1 uoranthene
benzo(g,h,i)perylene
benzo(a)pyrene
chrysene
dibenz(a,h)anthracene
fluoranthene
fluorene
indeno(l,2,3-cd)pyrene
naphthalene
2-methylnaphthal ene
2-chloronaphthalene
phenanthrene
pyrene

alpha-BHC
beta-BHC
delta-BHC
gamma-BHC
heptachlor
heptachlor epoxide
4,4'-DDT
4,4'-DDD
4,4'-DDE
                                                                  (Continued)
                                      2-44

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
                             TABLE 9.  (Continued)
Contaminant Type
    Compound Class
Representative Compounds
Semi-Volatile        Pesticides (cont.)
Organics (cont.)
                     Polychlorinated Biphenyls
                     (PCBs)
Semi-Volatile Metals

Non-Volatiles
Inorganic Metals and
Non-metals
endrin
endrin ketone
endrin aldehyde
endosulfan I
endosulfan II
endosulfan sulfate
aldrin
dieldrin
chlordane
methoxychlor
toxaphene

Arochlor 1016
Arochlor 1221
Arochlor 1232
Arochlor 1242
Arochlor 1248
Arochlor 1254
Arochlor 1260

Mercury

aluminum
antimony
arsenic
barium
beryl1i urn
cadmium
calcium
chromium
cobalt
copper
iron
lead magnesium
manganese
nickel
potassium
selenium
silver
sodium
thallium
tine
vanadium
zinc
NOTE:  Compounds identified by an asterisk (*) are not contained on the US EPA
       Hazardous Substance List (HSL).

                                      2-45

-------
          It is recommended that dispersion modeling results  initially be
obtained in terms of dispersion factors (i.e.,  concentration  divided by a unit
emission rate).  This will  provide a cost-effective basis  for estimating
receptor exposure concentrations for a wide variety of emission  constituents
(i.e., a compound-specific  concentration equals the dispersion factor of the
receptor location of interest times the compound-specific  emission rate).

2.4.4     Define Emission Inventory Methodology

          An emission inventory is a key input  to the Superfund  air dispersion
modeling.  Data obtained from Step 1 (Collect and review Input information)
should be utilized in determining the number and nature of sources involved.
The modeling plan should outline the procedures for:

          •    Estimating the dimension of the  sources involved.   This
               includes estimating the contaminant distribution  and defining
               the shape and boundaries of sources.

          •    Classifying  sources by configuration—area,  line,  volume, and
               point—and subdividing them as necessary.

          •    Determining  coordinates of the sources.

          t    Defining the constituents involved with each source based on
               the output of Section 2.4.3.

          •    Defining the parameters required for estimating emissions that
               are identified in Volumes II and III, and the  rationale for
               their selection.

          •    Calculating emissions based on methods outlined in Volumes II
               and III.

          •    Estimating particle size distribution for calculating
               particulate deposition.

                                     2-46

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          •    Accounting for downwash from nearby structures.  This

               phenomenon is particularly important for onsite air strippers

               and incinerators at Superfund sites.  These units frequently

               have low stack heights.  Therefore, releases from these stacks

               may be influenced by adjacent structures.


          •    Estimating the dimensions of obstructions and the distance of

               such obstructions from the sources under consideration.


          Program design objectives and DQOs should be an integral part of the

methodology outlined.


          The emissions inventory should be tabulated in a format suitable for

use in dispersion modeling.  This table should include physical and chemical

characteristics of the constituents to be modeled.


          As previously discussed, most of the Superfund air release sources

are area sources, followed by line and volume sources and to a lesser extent

by point sources.  Many of the area sources at Superfund sites have irregular

shapes and many cover a large area (e.g., many acres).  The ISC dispersion

model  handles area sources only as squares.  To accommodate the ISC model

input requirements, it may be necessary to subdivide a Superfund area source

into a number of smaller area sources, square in shape.  Source subdividing

into small, square area sources has the following two major benefits:


          t    The areas and shapes of irregular sources can be approximated

               in most cases by a number of small squares,  as illustrated in
               Figure 3.


          •    Receptors at or near the source can also be  included in the

               dispersion modeling, as often required for the Superfund APA.

               This includes receptors at onsite work areas, at the site

               perimeter,  and immediately offsite.
                                     2-47

-------
         •1
                 •9
                                •2
                                •3
                                •4
                                •5
                                •6
                                •7
                                 •8
                                                      •10
                                                      •11
Figure 3.  Representation of an Irregularly Shaped Area Source,
                              2-48

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          A specialized modeling approach is generally needed for standard

Gaussian dispersion models such as the ISC, in order to obtain concentration

estimates near the boundary of a large area source.   For example, the

nested-area subdivision approach illustrated in Figure 4 can be used.  By

subdividing the area source such that the square nearest the receptor is less

than 10 meters on a side, it is possible for the ISC dispersion model to

provide estimates of concentration within 1 meter of the source boundary.


          Flux models, which simulate the microscale physics immediately above

a ground-level emission surface, can also be used to estimate concentration at

and in the vicinity of an area source.  Although these flux models can be

technically sophisticated, they generally lack extensive validation and are

not recommended as preferred models for Superfund APAs.


2.4.5     Define Meteorological Data Base


          Meteorological data are also key input to the dispersion

calculations.  As noted, input meteorology governs the transport and

dispersion of the contaminant plume.  It is therefore imperative to select the

most appropriate meteorological data.  For most Superfund activities (RI/FS,

remedial design, and operation and maintenance), historical data are very

useful.  In the absence of a long record of onsite data, data applicable for

use in dispersion modeling are generally available from NWS stations, state

meteorological programs, and private industry.  Generally at least one year of

meteorological data should be available for screening analyses.  It is

desirable to have five or more years of meteorological data to support

long-term exposure assessments for refined APAs.


          As discussed in Section 2.2.4, onsite meteorological data should be

used:
                                     2-49

-------
                         Wind Direction
Receptor at
site boundary
Nested subdivisions, as
necessary to yield areas
of <100m2
  Figure 4.   Example of  Nested Subdivision of Area Source,
                               2-50

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          t    To evaluate (correlate) offsite data;


          t    To provide site specific data showing the diurnal variations of

               the meteorological parameters and the effects of topography and

               nearby water bodies on the transport and dispersion of the air

               toxics plume; and


          •    Define worst-case emission/dispersion scenarios to

               conservatively evaluate short-term exposure conditions to

               support screening APAs.  Worst-case scenarios should represent

               the highest impact resulting from the combination of

               meteorological conditions giving high emissions and low

               dilution.


          The data base selected should meet program and DQO objectives, have

a record of sufficient length, and include data representative of the site

area.  Some guidance on the determination of representativeness of

meteorological data can be found in the "On-Site Meteorological Program

Guidance" document referenced below.  Due to uncertainties associated with the

use of off-site data, it is often advisable to establish an on-site

measurement program as early in the site remediation process as possible.


          Meteorological data may be used to define worst-case emission/

dispersion scenarios to conservatively estimate short-term exposure conditions

to support screening APAs.  For example, this approach would be appropriate
for use of ISCST for a screening APA.  However, for a refined APA based on

ISCST a sequential file of hourly meteorological data may be warranted as
modeling input.


          The quality of the meteorological data should meet EPA requirements

as outlined in the following technical references:
                                     2-51

-------
          t    U.S. EPA.  June 1987.  On-Slte Meteorological Program Guidance
               for Regulatory Modeling Applications.  EPA-450/4-87-013.
               Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research
               Triangle Park, NC 27711.

          •    U.S. EPA.  February 1983.  Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
               Pollution Measurements Systems:  Volume IV.  Meteorological
               Measurements.  EPA-600/4-82-060.  Office of Research and
               Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

          •    U.S. EPA.  July 1986.  Guidelines on Air Quality Models
               (Revised).  EPA-405/2-78-027R.  NTIS PB 86-245248.  Office of
               Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC
               27711.

          t    U.S. EPA.  November 1980.  Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for
               Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD).
               EPA-450/4-80/012.  NTIS PB 81-153231.  Office of Air Quality
               Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.

          The modeling plan should also identify the following information
with respect to the meteorological data set:

          •    Source of meteorological data  and rationale for selecting this
               data base.  This applies to both surface and upper-air data.

          •    Length of record.  A minimum of 1 year of hourly data is
               required, with 5 years of data being preferred.

          t    Parameters to be utilized in the dispersion model, including
               wind speed, wind direction, atmospheric stability, ambient
               temperature, and mixing height.

          An onsite meteorological program is recommended in the case of the
remedial action step.  Section 3.0 addresses  the requirements of onsite

                                     2-52

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
meteorological programs for that step.  Even flat terrain sites with nearby
National Weather Service data should install and operate an onsite

meteorological station during remedial actions.  The short-term temporal and

spatial variability of wind conditions limits the applicability of offsite

meteorological data for realtime decision-making (e.g., during non-routine air

releases).  Data collected through this step can be utilized as historical

data in making the dispersion calculations and in assessing routine air

releases, or as near real time data in estimating the impact of nonroutine air

releases.  The modeling plan for the remedial action step should address the

use of onsite meteorology in dispersion modeling for both routine and

nonroutine releases.


          Meteorological parameters used for each application should be

identified, and an explanation should be given of their use.


2.4.6     Design Receptor Grid


          The selection of the proper number and locations of receptors is

paramount for a meaningful dispersion modeling analysis.  It is therefore

important to carefully select receptors to ensure that the areas of potential

impact include the desired spatial distribution of receptors.


          A receptor grid or network for a Superfund air dispersion model

defines the locations of calculated air concentrations that are used as a part

of the APA to assess the effect of air releases on human health and the

environment under the various Superfund site activities.


          The process of setting the receptor grid should meet the following
APA objectives:
                                     2-53

-------
          •    Provide concentration estimates which can be used as input to
               the Superfund risk assessment process and to compare to ARARs;
               and

          •    Provide technically sound spatial distribution of receptors to
               account for areas exhibiting large concentration gradients over
               short distances, by increasing the density of receptors at
               these locations and ensuring that locations of high
               concentrations are not missed.

          It is therefore important to establish a receptor grid that will
address both the locations of anticipated maximum air toxics concentration and
the air toxic concentrations at environmentally sensitive receptors such as
residences, work areas, schools, hospitals, parks, and monuments.

          Concentration averaging times should be a factor in setting the
receptor grid based on the APA objectives.   For short-term averaging times (up
to 24 hours), the selection of receptors should be based on the objective of
protecting public health and the environment at all publicly accessible areas
around the Superfund site.  In this respect the receptor should include
locations of anticipated maximum air toxics concentration offsite.   With
respect to long averaging times (monthly, seasonal, annual, 70 years,  or
others) air toxics concentrations should be evaluated at actual  receptor
locations (i.e.,  in areas surrounding residences,  work places, and  at
locations with environmentally sensitive species).

          From a  practical viewpoint, most  of the Superfund release sources
can be regarded as ground-level  sources. Only a few of them are elevated, and
even they are classified as low-level elevated sources.  Examples include
onsite structures and onsite treatment facilities (e.g., incinerators,  air
strippers).  This implies that,  for most releases from Superfund sources,
high-ground-level concentrations of air toxics will occur at short  distances
from the source.   Depending on the source configuration and the release
height, such concentrations will occur less than 1 to 2 kilometers  from the
source.
                                     2-54

-------
I
I
•                  The receptor grid system for Superfund  APAs  should  be  developed  on  a
          case-by-case basis.   The basic objective is  to resolve concentration gradients
I
I
in the vicinity of the site and to identify maximum concentrations.  Receptor
grid design should also consider the following:

          •    Results of the receptor data evaluation performed under Section
               2.2.3;

          •    Results of screening and refined screening dispersion modeling
               that can be invaluable in terms of identifying gradients and
               potential locations of high concentrations;
I

I

I

I                  •     Prevailing  wind  direction;

•                  •     Meteorological conditions conducive  to  high  concentrations;

•                  •     Population  distribution  in  the  site  vicinity (Section  2.2.3);
          •    Sensitive receptor locations;

          •    The number and configuration of sources;
I
                    •     Release  characteristics  such  as height, dimensions,  and
•                       proximity  to  the  site perimeter;

•                  •     Work  areas on the  site;  and

•                  •     Locations  of  air monitoring stations.

_                  Screening  analyses, especially for short-term exposure evaluations
|       may be based on worst-case meteorological scenarios which assume invariant
         wind conditions.  Therefore,  for  a single source evaluation based on these
I       conservative assumptions,  the screening analysis calculational grid points may
         be limited to the plume centerline for the downwind sector of interest.

I
I
                                     2-55

-------
          These factors should be considered in selecting onsite, perimeter,
and offsite receptors.  The rationale for the selection of the number and
locations of each type of receptor should be stated.  Depending on the
specific application, the number of receptors in a refined analysis could
range from 200 to 400.

2.4.7     Detailed Modeling Methodology

          The modeling methodology is based on the objectives outlined in
Table 1 for dispersion modeling as a function of the Superfund activity, and
it is consistent with the DQOs for the project.  As discussed in Section
2.4.2, it is necessary to determine the level of sophistication of the
dispersion modeling, the input data requirements, and the quality of data.
This determination will  permit assessment of the costs and benefits of the
modeling methodology and the effects of the uncertainties involved on the
Superfund APA.

          Screening modeling is useful for obtaining rough upper-bound
estimates of the levels of air contaminant concentrations and the approximate
locations of high concentrations and providing information on the need for
refined dispersion modeling.  Screening models are presented in Table 6.  The
selected methodology should take into account the following:

          •    Screening versus refined modeling applications;

          t    Formulation to be used;

          •    Applicability of the approach to the Superfund activity and
               source under consideration;

          •    Concentration averaging time;

          •    Special considerations such as downwash;
                                     2-56

-------
I
I
I                 t    Dispersion parameters;
                   •    Plume rise considerations; and
                   •    Quality and quantity of meteorological data available  (e.g.,
                        the availability of representative data recommended to support
                        refined dispersion modeling analyses).

                   For refined dispersion modeling, the model to be used should be
         selected from Table 7.  The ISC dispersion model is the preferred model for
         most Superfund APAs.  When there is a need for characterizing time-dependent
         releases, the INPUFF model should be utilized.  Other models listed in Table 7
         could also be used on a case-by-case basis.

                   The dispersion modeling plan should address the following for
         refined modeling:

                   t    Selected model and rationale;
I

I

I

I

I

I

I

                   t    Model applicability, as determined by the Superfund activity
                        •involved and source characteristics.  For example, nonroutine
                        releases during the remedial action step should be considered
                        when the model is selected;
                   •    The rural or urban character of the area, based on demographic
I                      data;
•                 t    Wake and/or downwash effects, including those attributable to
                        onsite obstructions;
I                 •    Particle deposition, taking into consideration the particle
                        mass-size distribution;


I
I
                                              2-57

-------
          •    Plume rise and dispersion parameters, including initial
               dilution parameters; and

          •    Model switches (tabulation).

          In addition, a brief synopsis of the model formulation should be
discussed.

2.4.8     Estimated Background Concentrations

          Background air concentrations are an integral part of many air
quality studies that involve dispersion modeling.  Such information is useful
in estimating the cumulative impact of air toxic contaminants as well as the
incremental  impact of the Superfund site activities.  The major application
for background concentration estimates is to assess conformity with ambient
air quality criteria for ARARs.

          Measurement of air quality in the vicinity of a Superfund site could
provide the necessary information on existing background air quality levels,
providing the following are met:

          t    The air monitoring network was designed and implemented
               following procedures similar to the guidelines provided in
               Section 3.0.

          •    The network monitored several  of the site-specific target
               compounds.

          Background air quality data could be obtained from previous air
monitoring programs conducted in the site vicinity, as discussed in Section
2.2.5.  It also could be obtained through the implementation of an air
monitoring program in the vicinity of the site as a part of the Superfund site
activity.   In areas where there  are large sources of toxic air pollutants
close to the Superfund site, modeling these sources can be performed in order
to determine background concentrations.

                                     2-58

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          The modeling plan should address the subject of background air

quality for the Superfund project and delineate the process for estimating

background levels based on existing data, proposed air monitoring, or

additional modeling.  The project objectives and DQOs should serve as a key

factor in assessing the background levels in the vicinity of the site.


2.4.9     Define Dispersion Calculations To Be Performed


          Once the overall scheme for dispersion modeling has been outlined,

the dispersion calculations to be performed must be defined.  This includes

the following:


          t    Averaging times for calculating concentrations,

                    Short term:  hourly and 3-, 8-, and 24-hours.

                    Long term:  monthly, seasonal, annual, or other;


          t    Dispersion modeling scenarios as a function of the Superfund

               activity under consideration.  For example, the RI/FS activity

               may require modeling the no-action scenario or scenarios

               associated with the alternative remedial actions.  The remedial

               design activity may require modeling a few scenarios associated

               with a specific onsite technology; and


          •    The reporting format for calculated results,

                    Tables summarizing receptors that exhibit high

                    concentrations and sensitive receptors with associated

                    concentrations, for various averaging times.

                    Isopleths of concentrations for the site area.


          The modeling plan should outline the type of dispersion calculations

to be performed and present results of the calculations.
                                     2-59

-------
2.4.10    Document the Modeling Plan

          The modeling plan should be documented according to the discussion
provided in Sections 2.4.2 through 2.4.8, utilizing the outline suggested in
Table 9.

2.5       STEP 4 - CONDUCT MODELING

2.5.1     Overview

          Dispersion modeling for Superfund APA applications should be
conducted consistent with the modeling plan developed during Step 3.  However,
successful  implementation of the modeling plan requires qualified modelers and
attention to QA/QC factors such as verifying all model input files.

2.5.2     Staff Qualifications and Training

          Dispersion modeling is a complex process that requires specialized
qualifications and training.  This aspect of modeling has been frequently
overlooked as personal computer (PC) versions, which are easy to use, have
become prevalent.  However, it is also easy for the novice to select
inappropriate modeling options and/or enter data incorrectly.  These errors
can be subtle in nature and difficult to detect, and they can significantly
affect the validity of the modeling output.  Also, interpretation of modeling
data requires a thorough understanding of the theory on which the model is
based and on input data/model limitations.  Therefore, it is imperative that a
qualified dispersion modeler thoroughly familiar with the modeling process and
the required QC documentation be assigned to provide dispersion modeling
support for Superfund APA applications.
                                     2-60

-------
I

I
•       2.5.3      Performance of Modeling

_                  This  section  addresses the process of performing dispersion modeling
|       for a Superfund APA with emphasis on quality control.  The modeling can be
         executed by  hand calculation  or computer models when screening dispersion
•       modeling (depending on  which  of the alternative approaches listed  in Table 6
         is selected)  is considered.   It is implemented with a computer when refined
•       dispersion modeling is  performed.
                   The  screening dispersion modeling process  includes the following

          steps:
I

I                  •     Calculate  the  emission  release rate or total release;

I                  •     Derive the source parameters required as additional  input;

•                  •     Define the special  parameters required to estimate wake effects
•                       or  negative plume buoyancy;

I                  0     Select the meteorological data set or scenario to be modeled;

I                  0     Define the receptors  for which calculations will be  performed;

I                  0     Perform  the calculations (generally using computer models); and

•                  0     Obtain conservative concentration estimates.

_                  The  benefits  of simplicity in screening techniques can be easily
|        lost  if repeated calculations  introduce a higher probability of computational
          errors.  Screening calculations should always be accompanied by adequate
I        documentation  to permit QC checks  on the simulations.


I


I
.                                            2-61

-------
          The refined dispersion modeling process includes the following basic
tasks:

          •    Develop the emission inventory;

          •    Preprocess the meteorological  data;

          •    Develop the receptor grid (this generally involves refined
               screening modeling as previously discussed);

          •    Run bench mark test cases;

          •    Verify the input files;

          t    Perform model calculations;  and

          •    Obtain more realistic concentration estimates;

          The modeling process is delineated  in Figure 5.   The tasks involved
in these steps must be executed carefully to  minimize the  likelihood of
errors.  A small  error in one of the input  data files will  require rerunning
the model, thus increasing the expenses of  the project.  Subsequent sections
address the refined dispersion modeling process.  A similar but simpler
discussion applies to the screening modeling.

Develop Emission  Inventory

          This task calls for utilizing input data collected under Step 1
(Collect and review input information) (see Section 2.2) and developing an
emission inventory and other source data required as input to the dispersion
model.  The overall process of developing this data base was outlined in
Sections 2.4.3 and 2.4.4.  The emission inventory is developed using
source-specific formulas, factors, and procedures described in Volumes II and
III of this Guideline.  Calculated emissions  and related parameters should be
verified and tabulated in a format similar  to that presented in Table 3.

                                     2-62

-------
1
1
Develop Preprocess
Receptor Meteorological
•Grid (Sections Data (Sections
2.2.3 and 2.4.6) 2.2.4 and 2.4.5)

\r
I^___
Input into
Computer
_ Files
1
\ '
• Set Up Model
™ Switches
1
Run Benchmark
• Test Cases
1"
Verify Input
Files
1... 	
V
•Perform
Model
Calculations
1
1
Figure 5. The Dispersion Model
1
1
1
- 2-63

Develop Emission
Inventory
(Sections 2.2.2,
2.4.3, and 2.4.4)











ing Process.

-------
Preprocess Meteorological Data

          In most cases, meteorological data compiled under Step 1 (Collect
and review input information) (see Section 2.2.4) must be processed (e.g.,
using MPRM or RAMMET) prior to their use in the dispersion calculations, to
make them compatible with model  input requirements.  Model-specific
meteorological preprocessing requirements are defined in 'the users guide for
each EPA dispersion model.

          Preprocessing generally involves a large volume of data (e.g., 1
year of data includes 8760 hourly values for each meteorological parameter
under consideration).  In refined modeling, the preprocessing is done with a
computerized preprocessor that accepts on-site or NWS data and generates a
processed data base compatible with the dispersion modeling code.

          The meteorological data should be handled as outlined in Sections
2.2.4 and 2.4.5 and as discussed in reference material associated with each
modeling technique (see Tables 7 and 8).  The preprocessed data should be
checked for validity before their use.  Recommendations for meteorological
data validity checks are provided in Table 10 and in Section 3.6.2.

Develop Receptor Grid

          A receptor grid should be developed based on data collected under
Step 1 (Collect and review input information) (see Section 2.2.3) and the
process outlined in Section 2.4.6.  The grid can be rectangular or circular,
or it can consist of a selected number of receptors located at special
locations.  In general, all three forms are utilized by most of the refined
models included in Table 7.  The spatial distribution of receptors should be
determined based on factors discussed in Section 2.2.3 and on site-specific
considerations.  Once the grid has been established and coordinates assigned
using U.S. Geologic Survey (USGS) maps, the data base can be put into a
receptor file in a format compatible for use by a refined dispersion model.
                                     2-64

-------
1
1
1
•
1
1

1

1
•






1








1



1
1
1
1




TABLE 10. SUGGESTED METEOROLOGICAL DATA SCREENING CRITERIA8
(U.S. EPA, JUNE 1987)
Meteorological Variable
Screening Criteria8
Wind Speed Flag data if the value:
0
0

0


Wind Direction o
0

0

Temperature o
0


0


0


Temperature Difference o
0
0
8 Some criteria may have to



Is less than zero or greater than 25 m/s;
Does not vary by more than 0.1 m/s for 3
consecutive hours; and
Does not vary by more than 0.5 m/s for 12
consecutive hours.

Is less than zero or greater than 360 degrees;
Does not vary by more than one degree for more
than three consecutive hours; and
Does not vary by more than ten degrees for 18
consecutive hours.
Is greater than the local record high;
Is less than the local record low; (The above
limits could be applied on a monthly basis.)

Is greater than a 5* change from the previous
hour; and

Does not vary by more than 0.5'C for 12
consecutive hours.

Is greater than 0.1*C/m during the daytime;
Is less than -0.1°C/m during the nighttime; and
Is greater than 5.0'C/m or less than -3.0eC/m.
be changed for a given location.


2-65

-------
          The number of receptors may be limited for screening modeling based
on conservative input assumptions (e.g., worst-case, short-term meteorological
scenarios based on invariant wind conditions).  However, as previously
discussed, a more comprehensive receptor grid network is generally warranted
for refined screening modeling analyses to identify high concentration areas.
The results from the refined screening analyses may be used to limit the
calculational grid network to significant receptor locations for refined
modeling APAs.

          The coordinate of each receptor point should be verified as a
routine QC measure.

Run Benchmark Test Cases

          Two additional activities have to be performed prior to the
execution of actual dispersion model  runs in the case of refined modeling.

          The first involves model  runs with benchmark test cases to ensure
that the model performs as specified.  It is recommended that benchmark cases
accompanying the dispersion model be  utilized and results be checked against
these cases.

          The second activity involves the setting of model switches in
accordance with the case under consideration.  Switches provide the user with
the program setting options pertaining to input, dispersion model, and output.
Examples include receptor grid (rectangular or polar), rural or urban mode,
building wake and stack tip downwash  effects, printout of the 50 maximum
concentration values, and annual average concentrations.  It is important in
this case to consider the type of model output, based on the options
available, to avoid excessive printout without any use for most of it.   From
a practical viewpoint, daily and annual concentrations are the most useful in
assessing air release effects through the APA.  Once it has been determined
that the model performs properly and  the appropriate switches have been set,
the model is ready for execution.
                                     2-66

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Perform Model Calculations


          Once the input data files have been prepared and verified, the model

tested, and the switches set properly, the actual dispersion model

calculations are performed in accordance with the modeling plan.


2.6       STEP 5 - SUMMARIZE AND EVALUATE RESULTS


2.6.1.    Overview


          Modeling results available from Step 4 should be summarized and

evaluated to provide input to site-specific APA and the Superfund

decision-making process.  The recommended approach for this step is as

fol1ows:


          t    Summarize data;

          •    Evaluate modeling results; and

          •    Prepare a report.


          Output of the dispersion modeling should be summarized together with

pertinent source and meteorological data to serve as a basis for data

evaluation.  Calculated concentrations and their location can be used to

compare with ARARs or as part of the exposure assessment input to a risk

assessment.  The performance of the dispersion modeling for existing sources

could be assessed by comparing calculated and measured air concentrations.


          Results of the dispersion modeling, together with information on the

methodology employed, should be summarized in a modeling report.


2.6.2     Summarize Data


          In general, the output of computer model calculations is given in a

tabular form.  These data have to be summarized in a form that is useful for

the specific APA application.  Examples of recommended tabular data summaries

for air toxics indicator constituents include:
                                     2-67

-------
          •    Daily concentrations at sensitive receptor locations included
               in the dispersion calculations;

          •    Maximum long-term (monthly, seasonal, annual, or other)
               calculated concentrations;

          t    Daytime and nighttime maximum and average concentration
               estimates (for complex terrain and coastal sites only);

          •    Calculated long-term concentrations at sensitive receptors;

          •    ARARs;

          •    Summaries of calculated versus measured (as available)
               concentrations for short- and long-term averaging times; and

          •    Source-specific summaries for Superfund sites with multiple air
               release sources.

          A useful presentation of the results in graphic form is accomplished
by plotting concentration isopleths for indicator constituents.  These
isopleth summaries depict the areas affected by Superfund air release  sources.
Plots can be generated using specialized software (e.g.  SURFER) or using an
integrated modeling/plotting software package.  Figure 6 is an example of a
computer-generated,  ground-level  isopleth plot.

          Frequently,  it may not  be practical to place air monitoring  stations
at offsite receptor locations of  interest.  However, it  may be necessary to
characterize concentrations at these locations as input  to site-specific risk
assessments.  In these cases, concentration patterns based on modeling results
can be used to extrapolate concentrations monitored onsite to offsite
locations.  An illustration of modeling results for this application is
provided in Figure 7.
                                     2-68

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
           ESTIMATED ANNUAL      CONC.. UG/M3 (RURAL)
        29.00
        28.00
            80.00  81.00  82.00  83.00  84.00  85.00  86.00  87.00
Figure 6.  Example of a Computer Generated Ground  Level Isopleth Plot.
                                2-69

-------
ATMOSPHERIC DILUTION PATTERN
 • = NEAREST RECEPTORS
 + = MONITORING STATIONS
                                 0.1
                              •—"
    Figure 7. Example Atmospheric Dispersion (Dilution) Pattern.
                    2-70

-------
I
I
I
I
•
•

•
I
I
I
I
          Meteorological data summaries should include the following at a
minimum:

          •    Daytime wind rose (only for coastal or complex terrain areas);

          t    Nighttime wind rose (only for coastal or complex terrain
               areas);

          •    Summary wind rose;

          •    Summary of dispersion conditions for the sampling period (joint
               frequency distributions of wind direction versus wind speed
               category and stability class frequencies, or Stability Array
               (STAR) summaries;

          •    Tabular summaries of means and extremes for temperature and
               other pertinent meteorological parameters; and

          •    Data recovery summaries for all parameters.
                    Statistical  summaries  for  the meteorological data  should  be
I       presented  on  a monthly,  seasonal,  and  annual basis as well as  for the  entire
         modeling period.   For  sites with diurnal wind patterns (e.g.,  complex  terrain
I       or coastal  areas),  the modeling  should include  separate wind roses  for daytime
         and nighttime conditions and  a summary wind rose  (for all wind observations
•       during the monitoring  period).
          Data recovery information should also be presented to evaluate data
representativeness.  A minimum data recovery target should be 90 percent.

2.6.3     Evaluate Modeling Results

          Modeling results should be carefully evaluated and interpreted to
provide input to the Superfund risk assessment process.  Factors that should
be considered during this data evaluation phase include:

                                     2-71

-------
          t    Modeling concentrations;
          •    Source receptor relationship; and
          •    The need for supplemental analyses.

          Modeling results should also be compared to ARARs considering the
above data interpretation factors.  In addition, interpretation of dispersion
modeling results should account for additional factors such as complex
terrain, variable winds, multiple contaminant sources, and intermittent or
irregular releases.

          In situations where multiple sources are being modeled, it is
important to consider source-specific contributions to predicted
concentrations.  For example, remediation sources may involve soil handling
activities and an air stripper.  Maximum impacts may be dominated by soil
handling operations, and this information is important to determining what
emission controls are effective in reducing maximum concentrations to
acceptable levels.

Model Uncertainty/Receptor Applicability

          Field validation studies of Gaussian models have consistently
demonstrated that estimates of model uncertainty are largely inadequate,
particularly in their quantification of the representativeness of data and the
non-homogeneous and stochastic nature of atmospheric dispersion which are not
handled in models.  These studies have shown that the predicted locations of
maximum concentrations based on modeling results may not correspond with the
location of the maximum value based on field measurements.  Therefore, the
recommended approach is to consider maximum concentrations predicted off site
as controlling concentrations irrespective of whether the maximum receptor
coincides with a residence.  This is particularly important for short-term
(i.e., 24-hours or less) concentrations.  For long-term concentrations, the
location of maximum receptors in relation to residences can be considered on a
case-by-case basis as a factor in evaluating model results.
                                     2-72

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Supplemental Analyses


          Supplemental analyses may be warranted at complex terrain or coastal

locations 1n order to apply dispersion modeling results to Superfund APA

applications.  These supplemental analyses may Involve additional modeling

(e.g., wind flow field models, physical models, specialized mesoscale models)

to characterize local transport and/or diffusion conditions.  Frequently it

may be necessary to conduct specialized field studies that may involve

intensive meteorological monitoring materials and/or tracer studies.


          Figures 8 and 9 illustrate an example application of supplemental

analyses.  This Superfund site is located on the sloping terrain of a valley

wall.  Available dispersion models could not adequately characterize the very

localized dispersion conditions.  However, receptors were located at the site

perimeter, and it was necessary to characterize potential impacts associated

with soil handling operations at the onsite landfill.  Smoke and  SF6 tracer

studies were used to define transport paths for typical drainage flow

conditions.  These results are summarized in Figure 8.  Results from the

tracer studies were also used to develop a site-specific dispersion model.

These results are summarized in Figure 9.
                                     2-73

-------
ro
 i
       (D
       CO
       C3
       -t
       fa
       tu
      to
       O
       (O
       ut
       to
       C
                                                        Drainage  I:!OM Sw»li« Test  lesults

-------
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
              SPECIFIC ATMOSPHERIC DISPERSION MODEL
                                                  DILUTION
                                                   FACTOR
                    DILUTION
                     FACTOR
  FACTOR

  S
   «^TTt7« •
FACTOR
                                                         DILUTION
                                                          FACTOR
                    AREA AND DILUTION FACTORS
f •:
           Figure 9.  Drainage  Flow Impact Area and Dilution Factors.
                                    2-75

-------
          Supplemental analyses can be expensive and result In project
schedule delays.  Therefore, these analyses are generally only warranted if
unacceptable offsite air pathway impacts have been predicted based on
application of standard dispersion models and modeling procedures.

2.6.4     Prepare A Report

          A report summarizing the results of the dispersion calculations
should be prepared.  It should include the elements of the modeling plan
discussed in Section 2.4.  These elements basically outline the overall
methodology for the modeling.  The following is a recommended outline for the
report:

          I    Introduction

          II   Methodology
                    Constituents To Be Modeled
                    Emission Inventory
                    Receptor Grid
                    Detailed Modeling Methodology
                    Estimated Background Concentrations

          III  Modeling Results
                    Short- and Long-Term Concentrations
                    Areas of Potential Impact
                    Comparison with Applicable Air Toxics Guidelines

          IV   References

          V    Appendices
                    Meteorological  Data
                    Emission Inventory
                    Model Testing
                    Detailed Modeling Printout
                                     2-76

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                   The report  should  Include a sufficient amount of explanation of the
"       methodology  and results.   Figures such as isopleths of concentrations are
highly recommended.  Voluminous data printouts are often not necessary If the

data are carefully summarized and the full  set of data provided on a floppy

disk.
                                     2-77

-------

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                   SECTION 3

                           AIR MONITORING PROCEDURES
3.1       OVERVIEW


          Air monitoring is an air pathway analysis (APA) approach that can

provide direct measurements of air contamination levels at receptor locations

of interest.  This approach is useful for checking modeling predictions and as

part of the overall health and safety monitoring at Superfund sites.  Air

monitoring, however, is limited to existing sources.  Also, monitoring methods

with detection levels commensurate with health criteria may not be available

for all contaminants of interest.


          This section provides procedures for the selection and application

of air monitoring approaches for Superfund APAs.  The procedures are

necessarily general so as to apply to any generic site, and they are as

complete as possible so that potentially important considerations will not be

overlooked for any specific site.  Each consideration of the procedures will

not be applicable for every site, nor will it always have an equal relative

importance.


          Recommendations concerning air monitoring applications for specific

Superfund activities and sources have been presented in Volume I.  These

recommendations are cross-referenced and potential Superfund air monitoring

applications are summarized in Table 11.  A review of this information

indicates that air monitoring applications are directly related to specific

Superfund activities.  Therefore, the technical information and

recommendations in this section are frequently presented on a Superfund

activity-specific basis.
                                     3-1

-------
                           TABLE  11.  SUMMARY OF AIR  MONITORING  APPLICATIONS
Source Classification    APA Recommendations    Superfund Activities
                                                  Air Monitoring Applications
Pre-Remediation
Source
Characterize baseline   RI/FS -
air concentrations      Screening/Refined
                        Screening APA
Pre-Remediation
Source
Characterize baseline
air concentrations
RI/FS - Refined APA
•  Preliminary baseline air
   quality data and
   information on emissions.

t  Air Quality Data in support
   of the design of a refined
   air monitoring program to
   support the RI/FS (i.e.,
   preparation of site-
   specific Work Plan and
   Field Sampling and Analysis
   Plan).

•  Comprehensive baseline air
   quality for on-site,
   perimeter, and off-site.

t  Data are used as risk
   assessment input for the
   no-action alternative.

t  Data are used in evaluating
   remedial alternative
   actions.
                                                                                         (Continued)

-------
                                                TABLE 11.   (Continued)
        Source Classification    APA Recommendations    Superfund Activities
                                                  Air Monitoring Applications
        Remediation Source
        Remediation Source
CO
I
CO
        Post-Remediation
        Source
Characterize air
concentration during
remedial/removal
activities.
Remedial design
(pilot field studies)
Characterize air
concentrations during
remedial/removal
activities.
Remedial actions
(full-scale
operations).
Confirm controlled
source air
concentrations.
Operation and
Maintenance (post-
remedial activities)
•  Work area, perimeter, and
   off-site air monitoring
   program in support of pilot
   field studies.

•  Data are used to assess
   worker exposures and
   estimate the effect on the
   public and the environment
   during the remedial action.

t  Work area, perimeter, and
   off-site air monitoring
   program in support of
   clean-up activities.

•  Data are used to protect
   workers, the public, and
   the environment under
   routine and non-routine air
   releases.

•  Perimeter and off-site
   program to evaluate the
   performance of the remedial
   action.

•  Data are used to verify the
   effectiveness of the
   remedial action in
   protecting public health
   and the environment.

-------
          The procedures for air monitoring presented in this section are
based on a five-step process (illustrated in Figure 10):

          •         Step 1 - Collect and review input information;
          •         Step 2 - Select monitoring sophistication level;
          •         Step 3 - Develop monitoring plan;
          •         Step 4 - Conduct monitoring; and
          •         Step 5 - Summarize and evaluate results.

Each of these steps is briefly described below and discussed in more detail in
subsequent subsections.

          Step 1 - Collect and Review Input Information—Existing information
pertinent to the air monitoring program should be collected.  Possible sources
of information include site files, EPA guidance documents, local
meteorological stations, and the open literature.  Available information
should be obtained for emission sources, receptors, and historical
meteorological trends.  Once the existing data have been collected, compiled,
and evaluated, data gaps can be defined and a coherent air monitoring plan
developed based on the site-specific requirements.

          Step 2 - Select Monitoring Sophistication Level--The air monitoring
sophistication level should be selected from among screening, refined
screening, and refined monitoring techniques.  This .selection process depends
on program objectives as well as available resource and technical constraints.
Technical aspects that should be considered include the availability of
appropriate monitoring and analysis techniques for the toxic and hazardous
compounds present at the site.  Monitoring approaches should be evaluated
considering compound-specific factors, including detection limits, performance
criteria (e.g., precision, accuracy), and advantages and disadvantages of
alternative methods.
                                      3-4

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Emission Rates
APA Guidelines
Vols. Ill & IV
   EPA/NIOSH
   Monitoring
   Guidelines
  COLLECT AND REVIEW
     INFORMATION

  • Source data
  • Receptor data
  • Environmental
    characteristics
 Available
Monitoring/
 Modeling
   Data
                          SELECT MONITORING
                         SOPHISTICATION LEVEL
                         • Screening
                         • Refined
DEVELOP MONITORING PLAN
• Select monitoring
  constituents
• Specify meteorological
  monitoring
• Design network
• Select monitoring
  me thods/equipment
• Develop sampling and
  analysis QA/QC
       Peer
    Review/RPM
     Approval
                         CONDUCT MONITORING
                       • Routine operation
                       • Quality control
                       • Field documentation
                         SUMMARIZE/EVALUATE
                               RESULTS

                • Data review and validation
                • Data summaries
                • Consider monitoring uncertainties
                • Dispersion modeling applications
               Yes
                            No
                    ADDITIONAL MONITORING NEEDED
                                   Input to EPA
                                     Remedial/
                                     Removal
                                     Decision
                                      Making
Figure 10.  Superfund Air Pathway Analyses Air Monitoring Protocol.
                                 3-5

-------
          Step 3 - Develop Monitoring Plan—An air monitoring plan should be
developed.  Elements that should be addressed in the plan include (a)
selection of monitoring compounds, (b) specification of the meteorological
monitoring program, (c) specification of the monitoring network design (i.e.,
number and location of monitoring sites, probe siting criteria, sampling and
analysis methods, and program duration and frequency of monitoring), (d)
development of project data quality objectives (DQOs) and sampling and
analysis quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) procedures, and (e)
documentation of the air monitoring plan.  The plan will require review,
revision, and approval prior to starting monitoring.

          Step 4 - Conduct Monitoring—This step involves the day-to-day
activities of initiating and conducting an air monitoring program at a
Superfund site.  It includes the following: (a) final selection of air
monitoring sites, (b) installation and check-out of monitoring equipment, (c)
routine equipment operation and maintenance, (d) sampling calibrations and
checks, (e) audits, (f) handling of samples, (g) field documentation, (h)
sample analysis, (i) maintenance of laboratory data and records (including
chain-of-custody forms), (j) corrective action, and (k) other QA/QC procedures
necessary to ensure a successful monitoring program.

          Step 5 - Summarize and Evaluate Results--Data should be reviewed and
air monitoring results validated.  Additional  components of this step should
include (a) data processing, (b) preparation of statistical  summaries, (c)
comparison of upwind and downwind concentration results, and (d) concentration
mapping, if possible.  Estimates of data uncertainties based on instrument
limitations and analytical technique inaccuracies should also be obtained and
used to qualify air monitoring results.

          The following subsections present an expanded discussion of each of
these steps.
                                     3-6

-------
I

I
•        3.2        STEP 1  -  COLLECT AND REVIEW  INPUT  INFORMATION

•        3.2.1      Overview
                    The first step in the design and implementation  of  an  effective  air
|        quality monitoring  program is  the  compilation  and  evaluation  of  available
          information.   The following information,  at  a  minimum, should be considered
I        when developing an  air  monitoring  program design:
                    •    Source  data;
                    •    Receptor  data;
I
                    ••     Environmental  data;  and
                    t     Previous  APA data.

I                  Most  of  the  site-specific information required for Step  1  is
          available  from  the Superfund  remedial project manager/enforcement  project
•        manager  (RPM/EPM).  The  quality of  available information will depend on the
          nature and extent  of the previously performed studies.  In general,  the
          •quality  of information should improve as the Superfund process progresses
          since each step can build on  the results of previous work.

|                  Available information and data should be evaluated for the following
          factors:
I
                    t     Technical  soundness  of methodologies employed;
|
                    •     Completeness and quality of the data, including detection
•                       limits, precision, and accuracy;

                    •     Quality assurance/quality control results;

                    t     Compatibility  and applicability of the data; and
I
                    •     Existence of data gaps.

I
I
                                               3-7

-------
The results of the evaluation should be documented using a form similar to the
example presented in Table 12.  In addition, copies of data summaries should
be attached to the form to provide a convenient, complete documentation
package for the project files.

          The following subsections provide a further discussion of the
various types of data that should be collected during Step 1.

3.2.2     Source Data

          Site-specific information on the nature and extent of the in-situ
contamination is essential for estimating the magnitude of air emissions from
each of the source areas and in defining the primary airborne contaminants of
interest.  The data should be available from the Superfund RPM/EPM, though the
data will be relatively incomplete or uncertain until the RI/FS work has been
completed.  Specific information that should be collected and evaluated
includes:

          •    Specific source areas at the site and their estimated
               locations,  configuration, and dimensions based on information
               about past  contamination.  (Example source areas are lagoons,
               drainage ditches, landfills, contaminated soil surfaces, drums,
               tank and container areas, and structures within processing
               facilities.);

          0    Contaminants associated with each source area.  It will  be
               useful  to subdivide the contaminants into groups and subgroups
               with similar chemical  or physical characteristics: organics
               (volatiles, semivolatiles,  base neutrals, jpesticides, PCBs) and
               inorganics  (metals and other toxic compounds [e.g., H2S, HCN]);

          •    Toxicity factors important in evaluating the potential  risk to
               human health and the environment; and

          t    Identification and description of offsite air emission  sources.

                                     3-8

-------
                       TABLE 12.  EXAMPLE  -  SUPERFUND AIR MONITRING  PROGRAM INPUT INFORMATION  FORM
Data Tvoe
Source Data
• Site Layout Map
• Contaminants List
• Emission Inventory
• Contaminant Toxic ity
Factors
• Off -Site Sources
Receptor Data:
• Population Distribution
Map
• Identification of
Sensitive Receptors
•Site Work Zones Map
• Local Land Use
Environmental Data:
• Dispersion Data
- Wind Direction/
Wind Speed
- Atmospheric Stability
• Climatology
- Temperature
- Humidity
- Precipitation
• Topographic Maps
- Site
- Local Area
•Soil and Vegetation
Data C
(Yes or No
or N/A)




















Obtained
(Attachment f)





















Technical
Methods
Employed
Acceptable
(Yes or No)




















E
Completeness
and Quality
of Data
Acceptable
(Yes or No)




















valuation Facl
QA/QC
Appropriate
(Yes or No)




















ors
Data
Relevant
for this
Application
(Yes or No)





















Data Gaps
Significant
(Yes or No)




















Conmsnts




















I
vo
                                                                                                          (Continued)

-------
t*>
 t
%—*

o
                                                   TABLE 12.  (Continued)
Data Tvoe
Previous APA Data:
• Emission Rate Modeling
• Emission Rate Monitoring
• Dispersion Modeling
• Air Monitoring
• ARAR Summary
Data C
(Yes or No
or N/A)






total ned
(Attachment f)







Technical
Methods
Employed
Acceptable
(Yes or No)







Completeness
and Quality
of Data
Acceptable
(Yes or No)






valuation Facl
QA/QC
Appropriate
(Yes or No)






ors
Data
Relevant
for this
Application
(Yes or No)







Data Gaps
Significant
(Yes or No)






Comments







-------
I
I
I       3.2.3     Receptor Data
•                 Receptor data, when coupled with source data, can provide the basis
*       for a cost-effective air monitoring program design for a Superfund project.
I
I
I
I
         Receptor information that should be collected and evaluated includes the
         following:
|                 •    Results of  air dispersion modeling showing locations of
                        calculated  high, ground-level concentrations of air toxics
I                      contaminants emitted from the site and from other nearby
                        sources;

•                 •    Upwind and  downwind receptor locations based on prevailing wind
_                      conditions  at the site;

                   •    Population  distribution by 22.5-degree sectors in 1- to 2-
•                      kilometer increments for a distance of 10 kilometers from the
                        site;

                   •    Sensitive receptors within 10 kilometers of the site and
                        individual residences and buildings within 1 to 2 kilometers of
                        the site;
                   t    Site work zones as identified in the Health and Safety Plan;
                        and
I
                   t    Local land use characterization (e.g., residential, commercial)
                        within 10 kilometers of the site.
                   Sensitive receptor locations include schools, nursing homes,
         hospitals and other places associated with sensitive population segments, as
         well as locations with sensitive non-human receptors.
I

-------
3.2.4     Environmental Characteristics

          Existing information on the environmental characteristics pertinent
to a Superfund site should be considered when defining air pathway exposure
potential.  Environmental characteristics data that may be relevant to the
design of an air monitoring program include:

          •    Dispersion characterization data including wind direction/speed
               and atmospheric stability summaries;

          •    Climatological data representative of the site area, including
               wind, precipitation, temperature, and humidity conditions;

          t    Topographic features and water bodies at the site and vicinity;

          t    Soil and vegetation characteristics of the site and vicinity;
               and

          •    Any other environmental  factors that could affect the number,
               location, and type of air monitoring stations.

          Existing representative dispersion and Climatological  data will be
useful in evaluating the numbers and locations of air monitoring stations.
Wind data can be used for evaluating candidate upwind and downwind locations
for air monitoring.  Wind data,  atmospheric stability, ambient temperature,
and mixing height data can be used with an air dispersion model  (see Section
2) to provide estimated calculated concentrations for the contaminants of
interest at locations of maximum impact.  Temperature, precipitation, and
humidity data can influence the  selection of monitoring and analysis methods.
                                     3-12

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Topographic features and water bodies can affect the dispersion and
transport of airborne air toxic constituents.  It is therefore important to
understand local wind flows and to identify areas with topography and/or water
bodies that can influence the dispersion and transport of constituents
released from the site.  For example, a site located downslope of an elevated
terrain feature could be affected by nighttime downslope drainage flows.
Topographic features should also be considered in siting air monitoring
stations to avoid natural obstructions.

          Large water bodies can affect atmospheric stability conditions and
the dispersion of air contaminants.  In general,  large water bodies tend to
increase the stability of the atmosphere in the air layer adjacent to the
water, thus reducing the dispersion of air contaminants.

          Soil characteristics and conditions can influence emission rates of
volatile species from Superfund sites and have a large impact on the wind
erosion of contaminated surface soils.  It is important when considering
particulate matter emissions to understand soil conditions such as porosity,
particle size distribution, soil type, and source data.

          Vegetation, including shrubs and trees, can be a factor in siting an
air monitoring station due to flow obstructions and accessibility.  In
addition, vegetation can retard emissions of subsurface contaminants and can
affect air flow because of the increase in surface roughness.

3.2.5     Previous APA Data

          The Superfund APA recommendations presented in Volume I specify
conducting of emission rate modeling/monitoring and dispersion modeling as a
prerequisite to an air monitoring study.  Therefore, the following data should
be available from previous APAs and should be collected and reviewed:

          •    Onsite meteorological  monitoring data;

          •    Emission rate modeling data;

                                     3-13

-------
          t    Emission rate monitoring data;

          •    Dispersion modeling data;

          t    Air monitoring data; and

          •    Applicable or relevant and appropriate requirements (ARAR)
               summaries that identify air toxic exposure criteria.

          These APA data are significant input to development of a site-
specific air monitoring program.  If these types of data are not available or
do not meet completeness or QA/QC specifications, then it is recommended that
site-specific and source-specific APAs be conducted to estimate emission rates
and air concentrations (via dispersion modeling) to provide these inputs.
Overall recommendations on developing APA data are specified in Volume I.
Procedures for characterizing baseline air emissions from Superfund sources
are presented in Volume II, and procedures for characterizing air emissions
from remedial actions are available in Volume III.  Procedures for the conduct
of dispersion modeling studies to support Superfund APAs are presented in
Section 2 of this document.  ARARs are discussed in Volume I.

          Previous air quality data available for the site area that address
air concentrations of contaminants known to exist at the site can provide
insight on the existing levels of air toxic constituents of interest.
Compound-specific information will be useful  in assessing what indicator
compounds should be monitored and what monitoring and analysis methodologies
should be employed.

          Existing air quality data should be evaluated for acceptable
quantity, quality, and representativeness before use.  Factors to be accounted
for in these evaluations include:
                                     3-14

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          t    Monitoring and analysis techniques employed during the air
               monitoring program.  These include the type of techniques
               (screening, refined screening, or refined monitoring),
               associated detection limits, accuracy, and precision for the
               constituents monitored.

          t    Number and types of compounds that were monitored and analyzed.
               This information is important to determine the degree of
               interference between the compounds involved;  this often limits
               the usefulness of nonspecific compound screening analysis
               procedures, since the response from background compounds may
               overwhelm any response because of small levels of the compounds
               of interest.

          •    Records about equipment performance, maintenance, and
               calibration.

          •    Records of audits performed to evaluate program quality.

          t    Detailed description of the monitoring station setting to allow
               for an evaluation of the station siting.  Consideration should
               be given to siting criteria such as proper sample intake
               exposure, proper height above ground, and avoidance of man-made
               and natural obstructions that could affect or alter the air
               flow near the sampler intake.

          Existing air dispersion modeling for the site area can be useful in
evaluating locations for ambient air monitoring stations.  Coupled with
measured air quality data, results of air dispersion modeling offer an
objective means for siting air quality monitoring stations at locations of
maximum impact.  Data available from air dispersion calculations can be used
as input into the risk assessment, which can in turn be used in selecting
locations of sensitive receptors.  Procedures for the conduct of dispersion
modeling were presented in Section 2.
                                     3-15

-------
3.3       STEP 2 - SELECT MONITORING SOPHISTICATION LEVEL

3.3.1     Overview

          The selection of air monitoring sophistication levels, including
associated sampling and analytical methods, is the cornerstone of a successful
air monitoring program.  The three levels of sophistication described in this
section are screening, refined screening, and refined monitoring.  The
appropriate monitoring sophistication level for each Superfund project
application depends on the following factors:

          •    Source-specific APA recommendations (presented in Volume I);

          •    Input data from Step 1 (Table 12);

          •    Technical air monitoring objectives (Table 13);

          t    Overall project objectives and activity-specific air monitoring
               applications (Table 13);

          •    Legal and liability aspects of the Superfund project; and

          •    Pragmatic aspects of the program
                    Duration of the monitoring program
                 -  Time to obtain results
                 -  Technical  expertise of field personnel
                 -  Ability to accomplish the air monitoring program
                    objectives by obtaining good quality data with modest
                    uncertainties.

Of these factors, the time to obtain results (analytical turnaround time)
dictated by the program objectives is often the single most important criteria
when selecting from among air monitoring approaches.
                                     3-16

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
           TABLE  13.   SUMMARY  OF  TECHNICAL AIR MONITORING OBJECTIVES
 Superfund Activity
         Technical Air Monitoring Objective
RI/FS - Screening APA
RI/FS - Refined APA
t  Provide preliminary insight about the existence
   of air emissions and their characteristics
   (magnitude of air concentraitons, constituents
   involved and their distribution) by performing
   on-site measurements.

•  Provide preliminary air quality baseline (on-
   site and perimeter).

t  Provide preliminary information for on-site
   exposure (workers), perimeter and off-site
   exposure (population and the environment) under
   existing conditions.

•  Provide air quality data in support of the
   design of a good air monitoring program under
   the RI/FS step, including components of the
   Health and Safety Plan.
•  Provide detailed insight about the existence of
   air emissions and their characteristics
   (magnitude of emissions, constituents involved
   and their distribution) by perfoming on-site
   measurements.

•  Provide on-site air quality data during the
   field investigations in support of the Work
   Plan, Field Sampling and Analyses Plan and
   Health and Safety Plan to protect the field
   team.

•  Provide sufficient data base for perfroming a
   detailed risk assessment of the public and the
   environment based on on-site pereimter, and off-
   site air quality data under the baseline
   conditions (no-action alternative).

•  Provide sufficient data base for performing the
   evaluation of remedial alternatives.

t  Provide ground truth to dispersion modeling
   calculations.
                                                                   (Continued)
                                     3-17

-------
                            TABLE  13.  (Continued)
 Superfund Activity
         Technical  Air Monitoring Objective
Remedial Design
(field demonstration)
•  Provide on-site air quality data during the
   implementation of field pilot studies in support
   of the Health and Safety Plan for this step to
   protect on-site workers.

•  Provide perimeter air quality data for
   preliminary assessment of the effects of the
   remedial  action evaluated.
Remedial Action
   Provide work area air quality data for routine
   and non-routine air releases to protect workers
   and to provide a guidance for anticipated air
   concentration at site perimeter and off-site.

   Provide work area air quality data in support of
   an emergency response air dispersion model  and
   APA emergency field guide (see Appendix C).

   Provide perimeter and off-site air quality data
   in support of an emergency response air
   dispersion model.

   Provide work area,  perimeter, and off-site air
   quality data in support of protective actions
   during the remedial action activities.
Operation and Maintenance  •
   Provide a long-term air quality database at the
   site perimeter and off-site as a part of
   assessing the effectiveness of the remedial
   action implemented.
                           •  Provide a long-term air quality database at the
                              site perimeter and off-site to demonstrate the
                              protection of public health and the environment.
                                     3-18

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Source-specific APA recommendations have been presented in Volume I.
The APA strategy assumes that an initial screening APA should be conducted.
This screening work serves as one input for deciding when more refined air
monitoring work will be required.  The dominant considerations, however, for
selecting the monitoring sophistication level are the ambient levels of
specific contaminants expected at the site.  These data can be generated by
applying emission rate models to the known site and waste characteristics.
These emission rates are then used as input to dispersion models to predict
the concentration levels at receptor locations of concern, and these levels
are in turn compared to health-based action levels.  The greater the liklihood
for exceedances of the action levels, the greater the need for more refined
air monitoring data.

          Sophistication level recommendations presented in Table 11 should be
evaluated based on site-specific factors.  For example, input data collected
during Step 1 may include previous air monitoring results.  Therefore, these
data may provide sufficient information to preclude the need for screening
monitoring, although refined monitoring may still be warranted.

          The air monitoring objectives for specific Superfund activities
(e.g., RI/FS, remedial action) are the single important input for the
selection of monitoring sophistication levels.  These activity-specific
objectives are summarized in Table 16.  Input from the RPM/EPM should be
obtained to confirm site-specific air monitoring objectives and to ensure that
the air monitoring level selected is consistent with these objectives.

          The availability of appropriate monitoring methods is another
significant factor for monitoring sophistication level decision-making.
Certain compounds, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) for example, are not
conducive to screening monitoring.   A further discussion of available
monitoring methods is presented in Section 3.4.  It is also necessary to
consider the uncertainty associated with the monitoring results.
                                     3-19

-------
3.3.2     Definition of Monitoring Sophistication Levels

          Alternative monitoring sophistication levels for Superfund APA
applications can be classified as follows:

          •    Screening level
                    Screening techniques
                    Refined screening techniques; and

          •    Refined level
                    Refined techniques.

          Screening techniques are generally associated with relatively high
detection levels (i.e., in the range of parts per million for gaseous
contaminants and milligrams per cubic meter for particulate matter
commensurate with industrial hygiene measurements) and frequently are used to
provide real-time results in the field.  Quite often, these detection levels
exceed health criteria and ARARs.  Screening techniques are also quite limited
regarding the number of constituents that can be evaluated concurrently.
Therefore, screening techniques are most effective for monitoring near the
source to confirm the presence of an air release and for providing input
information to support the development of specifications for a more refined
monitoring program.  It is important to recognize that monitoring screening
techniques are not inherently conservative; therefore, the absence of air
concentrations  measured in a screening mode does not mean that air impacts
are entirely absent.

          Candidate screening techniques are summarized in Table 14.  The
screening techniques for gaseous constituents presented in Table 14 include
total hydrocarbon (THC) analyzers, colorimetric gas detection tubes,
electrochemical alarm cells, and screening portable gas chromatograph (GC)
analyzers.  Screening portable GC analyzers are available that provide gross
information on the concentration of an individual air toxic constituent.
                                     3-20

-------
                            TABLE 14.  AN OVERVIEW OF SCREENING AIR MONITORING/SAMPLING TECHNIQUES
to
 I
ro
Program
Sophistication
Level

Screening


Screening



Screening


Screening




Screening

Screening

Screening


Refined
screening


Refined
Screening
Category of Detection
Monitoring/Sampling Method Limit
Gas Phase:
• Total hydrocarbon • ppm
(THC) analyzers.

• Colorimetric gas • ppm
detection tubes and
monitors.

• Electrochemical alarm • ppm
cells

• Screening portable GC • ppb
analyzer


Part icu late Phase:
• Portable pumps with • mg/m
filters.
• Portable pumps with • mg/m3
filters and special
plugs.
• Portable aerosol • mg/m
monitor.
Gas Phase:
• Portable field GC • ppb
analyzers with
constant-temperature
oven.
• Field GC laboratory • ppb

Compounds Detected

• Most organ ics but
not by chemical
species.
• Various organ 1cs and
in-orgam'cs for a
specific chemical
species.
• Various organ Ics for
a specific chemical
species.
• Species expressed as
equivalent to a
selected single
species.

• Most inorganic
compounds
• Semi-volatile
chemical species.

• Total suspended
part icu lates (TSP).

• Limited list of
organic compounds by
chemical species.

• Limited list of
organic compounds by
Monitoring/Sampling Mode

• Realtime-continuous


• Historical-integrated



• Realtime-continuous


• Realtime-continuous




• Historical-integrated

• Historical-integrated

• Realtime-continuous


• Realtime-continuous



• Historical- Integrated

Typical
Uncertainty
Factors

±50-200%


±50-200%



±50-200%


±50-200%




±50-100%

±50-100%

±50-100%


±100%



±100%

                                                               chemical species.

-------
Screening techniques applicable to particulate matter include portable pumps
with special filters or plugs and portable monitors that detect changes in
light absorbance.

          Table 14 includes uncertainty values (UF) that typify the deviation
from a perfect method (i.e. a method with an uncertainty factor of ±1.0).  An
uncertainty of ±3.0 means a deviation of ±200 percent from the "true" value
can be expected.

          The typical uncertainty values are based on a qualitative assessment
of the various screening methods, experience, and field applications.  The
uncertainty values depend on the number of the air toxic compounds involved,
the concentration of the individual  compounds, and the interferences
introduced.

          Refined screening techniques can provide reasonably accurate
information on ambient air quality of organic compounds iin the gas phase at
the ppb level.  These refined screening techniques utilize a combination of
air sampling and a near-real-time analytical analysis without the use of
offsite laboratory facilities.   Refined screening air monitoring techniques
listed in Table 14 include field portable GC systems.

          Although similar to the refined methods discussed below, refined
screening techniques have the following relative  limitations as compared to
the more sophisticated refined  methods:

          t    The target analyte list is more limited;

          •    Only uncomplicated matrices of chemical  species can be
               analyzed; and

          •    QA/QC procedures are  less comprehensive than those used by a
               certified offsite laboratory.
                                     3-22

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Refined air monitoring is applicable to situations where high-

quality data are required and immediate response time for obtaining air

quality results is not required.  It also is applicable as a supplement to the

near-real-time air monitoring data obtained through the use of a refined

screening technique during the implementation of remedial actions.  In such a

case, the refined air monitoring technique provides high-quality results to

supplement and verify results of the refined screening monitoring.  Of course,

the comparison between the two is based on historical data.


          A listing of typical refined air monitoring techniques is presented

in Table 15.  A myriad of refined air monitoring techniques is available, and

the process of selecting the most suitable one can be difficult.  This is

because of the technical limitations of available monitoring methods and the

large number of target compounds that may be involved.  Furthermore, the field

of air toxics monitoring is still undergoing rapid development.


          In spite of the high quality of the chemical analyses involved with

refined air monitoring techniques, it is possible that the data obtained will

be useful only in a qualitative rather than a quantitative way.  The reasons

for this could be many.  Several factors that could affect the quality of the

data include the following:


          •    Large number of compounds involved;


          t    Variability in the concentrations of individual compounds and

               the need for low detection limits;


          •    Potential for the formation of artifacts during sampling;


          •    Interference between compounds during analysis; and


          •    Variable response of the analytical system as a function of the

               specific compound.
                                     3-23

-------
                                   TABLE  15.   AN  OVERVIEW OF REFINED AIR  MONITORING/SAMPLING  TECHNIQUES
Program
Sophistication
Level
Refined


Category of
Monitoring/Sampling Method
Gas Phase:
• Traps (sorbents and
cryogenics) and
laboratory analysis.
• Whole air samplers
(bags and canisters)
and laboratory
analysis.
• Liquid Impingers
Detection
Limit
• Fraction
of a ppb
to ppb.
• Fraction
of a ppb
to ppb.
• Fraction
of a ppb
to ppb.
Compounds Detected
• Many organic compounds
by chemical species.
• Many organic compounds
by chemical species.
• Aldehydes, ketones,
phosgene, cresol/
phenols.
Monitoring/Sampling Mode
• Historical-Integrated
• Historical-integrated
• Historical-Integrated
Typical
Uncertainty
Factors
±100%
±50%
±100%
           Refined
 i
ro
Participate Phase:
High-Volume samplers       • ngfm
with glass fiber
filter, membrane
filter or teflon
filter.

High-volume samplers       ng/m
with glass fiber
filter and
polyurethane foama
Inorganics
                                                                           PCBs and other semi-
                                                                           volatile organic
                                                                           species.
                                                                                                    •  Historical-Integrated
                         • Historical-integrated
±50%
±100%
           9 Polyurethane foam  (PUF) plug is designed to collect semi-volatile organic gases.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          This implies that a cost-benefit assessment may be useful.  In many

cases, a combination of sophistication levels will be appropriate.


          An expanded discussion of alternative screening and refined air

monitoring methods/equipment is presented in Section 3.4.


3.4       STEP 3 - DEVELOP MONITORING PLAN


3.4.1     Overview


          An air monitoring plan should be developed for each Superfund APA

application.  The objective of the plan is to document the Technical

Specifications for a site/source-specific monitoring program.  The plan also

provides an opportunity for peer review and RPM/EPM approval of the monitoring

program.  Developing a site/source-specific monitoring plan involves the

following major elements, as illustrated in Figure 11:


          •    Select monitoring constituents;

          •    Specify meteorological monitoring program;

          •    Design air monitoring network; and

          •    Document air monitoring plan.


          Major input to the development of an air monitoring plan should

include the information collected during Step 1 (e.g., identification of

previous APAs, ARARs), the target compound list for monitoring developed

during Step 2, and available EPA technical guidance.


          Procedures for the development of an air monitoring plan are

provided in the subsections that follow.
                                     3-25

-------
Input Data
 (Step 1)
    EPA
 Guidance
 Monitoring
Constituents
Target List
 (Step 2)
  Other
Technical
 Guidance
               SELECT MONITORING
                  CONSTITUENTS
                  (Figure 12)
                    SPECIFY
                 METEOROLOGICAL
               MONITORING PROGRAM
                  (Figure 13)
                  DESIGN AIR
               MONITORING NETWORK
                  (Figure 14)
                  DOCUMENT AIR
                MONITORING PLAN
                  (Figure 15)
                   INPUT TO
               STEP 4 - CONDUCT
                  MONITORING
 Figure 11.   Step 3  -  Develop Monitoring Plan,
                     3-26

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4.2     Select Monitoring Constituents


          The selection of compounds to be addressed in the monitoring program

is a challenging task for Superfund applications because of the extensive

number of potential release contaminants.  Sampling/analytical technical

factors and project budget limitations generally necessitate the selection of

a limited subset of target compounds.  The selection of target air monitoring

contaminants involves the following key factors:


          •    Physical and chemical properties of the constituents

                    Physical phase (gas, particulate)

                -   Volatility

                    Water solubility

                    Etcetera


          •    Toxicity and health effects (risk assessment) of the chemicals

               involved;


          •    Estimated concentration of a constituent relative to other

               constituents and potential interference;


          t    Availability of standard sampling and analysis methods and

               their performance;


          •    Overall and technical project objectives; and


          t    Data quality objectives and resource constraints.


          A list of the compounds included in the Hazardous Substances List

(HSL) developed by EPA for the Superfund program was presented in Table 9.

This list is a composite of the Target Compound List (TCL) for organics and

the Target Analyte List (TAL)  for inorganics.  Table 9 also includes examples

for additional  potential Superfund air emission constituents (e.g., HCN, H2S,

HC1).  Therefore,  Table 9 represents a comprehensive list of compounds from

which a list of target air toxics compounds can be selected.


                                     3-27

-------
          Emission rate measurement or modeling results should be obtained
prior to the conduct of air monitoring studies based on Volume I
recommendations.  These results as well as air monitoring data (as available)
should be used to identify appropriate site- and source-specific monitoring
compounds from Table 9.  Contaminants included in ARARs identified during Step
1 should also be used to identify target (i.e. indicator) compounds for air
monitoring.

          The limited set of target compounds based on previous APAs and ARAR
considerations should be ratioed to the appropriate health-based action level
to derive a hazard index (HI).  The HI values computed should then be ranked
from highest to lowest in order to develop a priority list of candidate target
compounds.  The final compounds selected for air monitoring should be a
function of the APA sophistication level and the technical feasability of
collecting and analyzing the various compounds.  A flowchart to assist in
selection is given as Figure 12.

          For screening applications, one to five target compounds with the
highest HI values for which appropriate monitoring methods are available
should be selected.  Target compounds could include total hydrocarbons for
organics and compound class indicators (e.g., ethers, aromatics) for organics
and inorganics.  Specific organic and inorganic contanrinantss could also be
selected.

          Refined screening monitoring applications should include the
selection of 5 to 10 target compounds with the highest HI values.  This
approach should facilitate the preliminary characterization of air releases at
Superfund sites.  Again, the selection process should consider the
availability of appropriate monitoring methods commensurate with health and
safety criteria.
                                     3-28

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Figure 12.  Flowchart for Defining a Target List of Compounds
             for Air  Monitoring.
                             3-29

-------
CO
 I
CO
o
                                                                         any compound(»
                                                                       regulated by •
                                                                                                              Retain compound)*) on
                                                                                                                  In*  general list
                                              Would
                                     omitting the compound(
                                       sacrifice  any  project
                                            objectives
                                                                      significant •
                                                                             compound!*)
                                                                                                                       Do
                                                                                                                 sampling and
                                                                                                             nalytlcal methods •«
                                                                                                         lor In* compound(i) (In proper
                                                                                                          physical slat*) that  satlsly
                                                                                                             the project  ob|«ctlv*s
                                                                                                                       7
         Miy
   any compund(s)
   rtbule to communll
Consider compound(s)
   for target list
                                                                                                                      Can
                                                                                                                  trw  project
                                                                                                               objectives  be re-
                                                                                                            defined  with approval
                                                                                                                 all  Interested
                                                                                                                    parties
Redefine project  objectives
 to disregard compound(s)
                                                                                                                                                                                                              defined
                                                                                                                                                                                                               target
                                                                                                                                                                                                                list
                                                                                                                              Management and technical
                                                                                                                               review of the target  1st


Include methods development
task to establish satisfactory
sampling/analytical methods
                                                                                                                                                                                                   Redefine  project  objectives
                                                                                                                                                                                                     to establish a target  tsl
                                                                                                                                                                                                    that can  be studied within
                                                                                                                                                                                                   the resources ol  the project

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Target compounds for refined APA monitoring should include all

contaminants with an HI value greater than or equal to 10 percent of the

composite HI value for the total mix.  These contaminants are expected to

represent the greatest contributors to potential health impacts.


          The target compound list should be periodically reevaluated, and

revised if warranted, as monitoring results become available.  This is

particularly useful for refined monitoring studies that are long term in

nature (e.g., during remedial actions).  For these applications it may also be

effective to periodically (e.g., monthly) sample and analyze for a more

comprehensive list of compounds to confirm the representativeness of the

routine target compound list.


3.4.3     Specify Meteorological Program


          A meteorological monitoring program should be an integral part of

Superfund air monitoring activities.  A meteorological survey can be used to

design the air monitoring network based on local wind patterns.

Meteorological and air quality data collected can be used for the

interpretation of air concentration data considering upwind/downwind exposure

conditions.  A recommended procedure for the development of a site-specific

meteorological program design is presented in Figure 13.


          The number and location of meteorological stations needed for a

site-specific application depend on local terrain conditions.  One

meteorological station is generally sufficient for flat-terrain sites.

However,  for complex-terrain sites it may be necessary to have multiple

stations  to represent major onsite/local  air flow paths.  Generally, one to

three stations will be sufficient for these sites.  To ensure a representative

exposure,  it is recommended that the meteorological stations be located away

from any  nearby obstruction at a distance equal  to at least 10 times the

height of the obstruction.
                                     3-31

-------
                       DETERMINE NUMBER
                        AND LOCATION OF
                        METEOROLOGICAL
                           STATIONS
    FLAT TERRAIN
     1 STATION
       COMPLEX TERRAIN
         1-3 STATIONS
                           DETERMINE
                           EXPOSURE
                            HEIGHT
    SCREENING/
REFINED SCREENING
      2-3 m
           REFINED
• 10 m - Primary parameters
•2m- Secondary parameters
                           DETERMINE
                          MONITORING
                          PARAMETERS
    SCREENING/
REFINED SCREENING
• Wind direction
• Wind speed
• Sigma theta
           REFINED
  Primary
  - Wind direction
  - Wind speed
  - Sigma Theta
  Secondary
  - Temperature
  - Precipitation
  - Humidity
  - Pressure
                        DETERMINE DATA
                          RECORDING
                           APPROACH
                    CONDUCT METEOROLOGICAL
                    SURVEY TO SUPPORT AIR
                   MONITORING NETWORK DESIGN
                        (As Necessary)
    SCREENING/
REFINED SCREENING
     1 week
           REFINED
           4 weeks
                  INPUT TO AIR MONITORING PLAN
     Figure 13.   Specify  Meterological Monitoring  Program.

                             3-32

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Meteorological sensor exposure height should be 2-3 meters above the

ground surface for screening and refined screening applications.  This

approach facilitates the use of portable stations, which can be rapidly

deployed.  For refined analyses the primary exposure height should be 10

meters (for wind and stability data) and 2 meters for parameters that do not

directly affect atmospheric dispersion.  For elevated releases such as those

from incinerators, primary meteorological parameters should also be measured

at stack height to the extent practicable.


          Meteorological monitoring parameters for Superfund applications can

be classified as follows:


          t    Primary parameters

                    Wind direction

                    Wind speed

                     Sigma theta (i.e., the horizontal wind direction standard

                    deviation, which is an indicator of atmospheric stability)


          •    Secondary parameters

                     Temperature

                     Precipitation

                     Humidity

                     Atmospheric pressure


          Primary parameters are representative of site dispersion conditions

and should be included in all meteorological  monitoring programs.   Secondary

parameters are representative of emission conditions and are generally only

recommended for refined air monitoring activities.
                                     3-33

-------
          Recommended meteorological monitoring system accuracies/resolutions
and sensor response characteristics are summarized in Tables 16 and 17,
respectively.  Field equipment used to collect meteorological  data can range
in complexity from very simple analog or mechanical pulse counter systems to
microprocessor-based systems.  A combination of these approaches is
recommended for Superfund applications.  This approach is generally not
expensive but it facilitates the convenient collection of meteorological data
that can be processed onsite at a field office using personal  computers (PCs).
The chart recorders provide a low-cost backup system if the digital data are
not available.

          A meteorological survey should also be conducted to support air
monitoring network design.  Exceptions would include sites that have
historical on-site meteorological data that are consistent with the DQOs or
flat-terrain sites for which representative offsite data are available.  The
duration of the meteorological survey should range from 1 week for
screening/refined screening applications to 4 or more weeks for the conduct of
a refined air monitoring program.  The survey should be conducted during a
period (season and time of day) representative of the planned air monitoring
program and air emission source operational schedules.  However, it may be
necessary to use historical offsite data to estimate seasonal effects for
planning purposes if the air monitoring program is scheduled to last for more
than a few months.

          Additional recommendations on meteorological measurements can be
obtained from the following sources:

          t    U.S. EPA.  June 1987.  On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance
               for Regulatory Modeling Applications.  EPA-450/4-87-013.
               Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research
               Triangle Park, NC  27711.
                                      3-34

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
           TABLE 16.   RECOMMENDED SYSTEM ACCURACIES AND RESOLUTIONS
Meteorological  Variable
    System Accuracy
Measurement Resolution
Wind Speed

Wind Direction

Ambient Temperature

Dew Point Temperature

Precipitation

Pressure

Time
±(0.2 m/s + 5% of observed

±5 degrees

±0.5'C

±1.5'C

±10% of observed

±3 mb (0.3 kPa)

±5 minutes
        0.1 m/s

        1 degree

        o.rc

        o.rc

        0.3 mm

        0.5 mb
                                     3-35

-------
  TABLE 17.  RECOMMENDED RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS FOR METEOROLOGICAL SENSORS


Meteorological Variable                    Sensor Specification(s)a


Wind Speed                    Starting speed <0.5 m/s; Distance constant <5 m.

Wind Direction                Starting speed <0.5 m/s at 10° deflection;
                              Damping Ratio 0.4 to 0.7; Delay distance <5 m.

Temperature                   Time Constant <1 minute.

Dew Point Temperature         Time Constant <30 minutes; operating temperature
                              range -30*C to +30*C.


a From Table 5-2.  On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for Regulatory
  Modeling Applications, U.S. EPA, Office of Air Quality Planning and
  Standards, Research Triangle Park,  NC  27711.  June 1987.
                                     3-36

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          •    U.S. EPA.  February 1983.  Quality Assurance Handbook for Air

               Pollution Measurements Systems:  Volume IV. Meteorological

               Measurements.  EPA-600/4-82-060.  Office of Research and

               Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.


          •    U.S. EPA.  July 1986.  Guidelines on Air Quality Models

               (Revised).  EPA-405/2-78-027R.  NTIS PB 86-245248.  Office of

               Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC

               27711.


          •    U.S. EPA.  May 1987.  Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for

               Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD).

               EPA-450/4-87/007.  Office of Air Quality Planning and

               Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.


3.4.4     Design Monitoring Network


          The air monitoring network design will be affected by factors such

as site-specific source, receptor, and environmental characteristics (see

Table 18).  Therefore, the design of an air monitoring network for a Superfund

APA must be decided on a case-by-case basis.  A recommended procedure for

designing an air monitoring network is presented in Figure 14.  Key components

of the monitoring network design include:


          •    Number of locations of monitoring stations;

          •    Probe siting criteria;

          •    Program duration and frequency of monitoring;

          t    Sampling and analysis methods; and

          •    Air monitoring equipment.


          Each of these components is discussed below.
                                     3-37

-------
   TABLE 18.  FACTORS AND ASSOCIATED ELEMENTS THAT AFFECT THE DESIGN OF AIR
                 MONITORING PROGRAMS FOR SUPERFUND APAs
   Factor
                  Elements
Technical air
  monitoring objectives

Source Characteristics
Receptor Data
Environmental Characteristic
Data Quality Objectives
See Table 12

t  Nature and extent of site sources (lagoon,
   landfarm, land disposal,  processing facility,
   tank farm, etc) and their size.
•  Constituents involved and their physical
   state (gas, particle, total).
•  Estimated emission rates  (measured or
   calculated).
•  Site source grouping.

t  Historical air quality data for the site area
   representing on-site, perimeter, and off-site
   measurements and the quality of the data.
•  Results of air dispersion modeling and
   locations of high calculated air toxics
   concentrations.
t  Number and locations of sensitive receptors
   (population; sensitive population locations-
   schools, hospitals, etc.; sensitive
   environmental species and settings such as
   flora and auna, state parks, and monuments,
   national parks and monuments,  etc.) and
   distance to these locations.

t  Historical records of meteorological data
   representing the site area including
   diffusion climatology and special conditions
   conducive to high concentration of airborne
   contaminants.
•  Topography in the site ara and its potential
   effect on local dispersion conditions, and
   its proximity to the site.
t  Water bodies in the site  area, number, size
   and proximity to the site.
   Database for worker protection only.
   Database for worker, public and environmental
   protection.
   Laboratory turn-around time.
   Detection limit for constituents involved.
   Precision and accuracy of monitoring and
   analyses methodologies.
                                                             (Continued)
                                     3-38

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                             TABLE 18.  (Continued)
   Factor
                  Elements
Data Quality Objectives
(Continued)
Source Characteristics
Constraints
Receptor Constraints
Environmental Constraints
Data Quality Objective
Constraints

Resource Constraints
   Data representativeness.
   Data completeness.
   Data comparability.
   Data use for Superfund APA application.
   Frequency of monitoring and program duration
   (short - few days to weeks; intermediate -
   few weeks to few months; long - a year or
   more).
   Monitoring mode (real-time - instantaneous,
   continuous historical - integrated).
   QA/QC requirements (data validation,
   equipment calibration, equipment and
   documentation, data handling, chain-of-
   custody, audits).
•  Large number of air toxics compounds with
   high level of air emissions (volatile; semi-
   volatile, base/neutral, pesticides, PCBs,
   inorganic).
•  Mixed physical state (gas, particulates).
•  Non-homogeneous source.
•  Incomplete source characterization and data
   gaps.
   Large number of receptors are identified for
   the specific application.
   Large number of obstructions close to the
   receptors identified (trees, bushes,
   structures, etc.).
   Accessibility to receptors.
   Availability of utilities.
   Security.

   Complex Topography
   Large water body(ies)
•  Limited or no applicable monitoring and
   analysis methodologies.

t  Limited budget
•  Limited Time.
                                     3-39

-------
                            CONSIDER DESIGN
                                FACTORS
                               (Table 18)
  METEOROLOGICAL
      SURVEY
       DATA
 DETERMINE NUMBER
 AND LOCATIONS OF
  AIR MONITORING
     STATIONS
                            DETERMINE PROBE
                            EXPOSURE HEIGHT
                              (Table 19)
                           DETERMINE PROGRAM
                           DURATION/SAMPLING
                               FREQUENCY
                               (Table 20)
    EPA
 GUIDANCE
(Table 21)
SELECT MONITORING
     METHODS
    (Table 21)
                           SELECT MONITORING
                               EQUIPMENT
                             (Table 30,  31)
DISPERSION
 MODELING
 RESULTS
     OTHER
   TECHNICAL
   GUIDANCE
  (Appendix A)
                               INPUT TO
                            AIR MONITORING
                                 PLAN
              Figure 14.  Design Air Monitoring Network.
                                 3-40

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Determine Number and Locations of Monitoring Stations


          The number and location of monitoring stations for an air monitoring

network depend on the site-specific characteristics listed below:


          •    Results of air dispersion modeling for the site area utilizing

               an atmospheric dispersion model applicable to the source and

               site (see Section 2.0 in this volume);


          •    Environmental characteristics (meteorology, topography, soil

               characteristics, etc.);


          •    Receptor characteristics (population centers, sensitive

               population and environmental locations, locations of calculated

               high concentrations of air toxics);


          •    Source characteristics  (type and extent of contamination,

               locations of hot spots, etc.);


          t    Siting constraints; and


          f    Duration of the monitoring program.


          Meteorological variables affecting monitoring network design include

wind direction, wind speed, and atmospheric stability.  These parameters can

be used to define prevailing wind patterns and characterize local dispersion

conditions.


          Air monitoring programs that last for only 2 weeks or less (e.g.,

screening APAs) require some judgment about the placement of monitoring

stations and their numbers.  This is because the use of historical

meteorological data would generally not provide accurate information on the

meteorological conditions for the few days of sampling and analysis.  However,

the results of a meteorological survey onsite (see Section 3.4.2) conducted

just prior to screening can help to identify expected wind patterns and


                                     3-41

-------
downwind sampling sectors, and to characterize temporal  wind direction
variability.  Meteorological forecast information can also be used to deploy
screening air sampling equipment.  Therefore,  it is recommended that air
screening samples be taken with portable sampling equipment.

          Many factors should be considered in selecting locations and the
number of monitoring stations for air monitoring programs with the duration of
several weeks to several months, as discussed  in the following paragraphs.

1.        Predominant wind directions, based on historical records, for the
          monitoring period under consideration.  This may involve the review
          of daily, weekly, and monthly meteorological records.

2.        Time of the year the monitoring program is scheduled, to account, to
          the extent possible, for seasonal effects that could cause either
          high or low ambient air concentrations.  Seasons that in general do
          not exhibit high-ground-level concentrations of the constituents
          involved should not be considered as candidate periods for air
          monitoring.

3.        Use of a dispersion model (screening or refined) to calculate
          ground-level concentrations in the site vicinity and to determine
          locations of maximum calculated concentrations for short-term (up to
          24 hours) averages and long-term (monthly, seasonal, and annual)
          averages.  Input into the dispersion model, including source data,
          meteorology, topography, population  centers, sensitive population,
          and environmental setting locations, should be defined for the time
          averages under consideration in order to obtain model output showing
          the receptors of maximum impact on the population and the
          environment.  It is extremely important to consider concentration
          gradients revealed by plotting model results as isolpeths of
          concentration.  Steep gradients suggest that a greater number of
          monitoring locations would be required than for broad gradients.  In
          general, the  impacts of elevated point sources display steep
                                      3-42

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          concentration gradients and the impacts of low-level, area sources
          display broad concetration gradients.

4.        Source size and configuration.  It is preferable to locate an air
          monitoring station downwind from a source so that it will be exposed
          to a large fetch of the source area for a long period,  considering
          the frequency of occurrence of wind direction.

5.        Locations of sensitive receptors at the site perimeter and offsite.
          The locations and number of monitoring stations at sensitive
          receptors should be evaluated considering meteorological  conditions
          conducive to high, ground-level concentrations of airborne air toxic
          constituents and their frequency of occurrence.  From a practical
          viewpoint, it is important to consider the following:

          5A.  Locations of anticipated high-ambient-ground-level
               concentrations of air toxic constituents and the frequency of
               occurrence of the meteorological conditions that are conducive
               to these levels.   Depending on the monitoring objective,  the
               first priority should be to select locations that  will  most
               frequently be exposed to high concentrations of such
               constituents.

          5B.  Population and environmentally sensitive locations.   In
               evaluating locations, it is important to consider  the
               objectives of the monitoring program:  to provide  information
               on possible high  impact at sensitive receptors,  specifically, a
               high dose to an individual person or species or a  high
               integrated dose to the nearby population.  This factor  will
               dictate the selection of a monitoring station representing
               small  but highly  sensitive or large but less sensitive
               population and environmental  species.
                                     3-43

-------
6.        Meteorological  conditions

          6A.  Wind directions and speeds and atmospheric stabilities
               conducive to high-ground-level concentrations of air toxic
               constituents for both short-  and long-term averaging periods.

          6B.  Local day/night wind flow and stability conditions for the area
               and monitoring period under consideration.

          6C.  Characteristics of the regional  flow regime for the area and
               the monitoring period under consideration.  For example, it may
               occur that the regional flow for this site for the monitoring
               period of interest is generally southwesterly, and that the
               local night drainage flow under stable conditions is
               northeasterly.  Accordingly,  a monitoring location southwest of
               the site would be the upwind location for the regional flow and
               the downwind location for the more limiting local flow.

          6D.  Results of previous air quality monitoring programs in the
               vicinity of the site that could be considered applicable to the
               case in question.

          6E.  Results of previous air dispersion calculations for similar
               sources with meteorological data considered representative of
               the site conditions.

7.        Topographical features that would influence the advection and
          transport of air toxic constituents.   Examples include land surface
          elevations, valley channels, and the land-water interface.
                                     3-44

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Air monitoring station numbers and locations are highly site-

specific, and therefore no specific recommendations are being made.

Generally, however, a single downwind stationary monitor is not adequate to

monitor for maximum concentrations.  The examples presented in Section 4, as

well as, the factors listed above, should be examined before deciding on a

network design.


Determine Probe Exposure Height


          The placement of air monitoring and meteorological stations must

conform to a consistent set of criteria and guidance to ensure data

comparability and compatibility.  A detailed set of probe siting criteria for

ambient air monitoring and meteorological programs is given in the following

EPA document:


          •    U.S. EPA, May 1987.  Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for

               Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSDK

               EPA-450/4-87/007, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.

               Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.


          A summary of key factors that should be considered as a part of the

placement of an air quality monitoring station is given below.  The reader is

referred for more details to the above-referenced document.


          Key siting factors include:


          •    Vertical-placement above ground;

          •    Horizontal spacing from obstructions and obstacles;

          t    Unrestricted air flow;  and

          •    Spacing from roads.
                                     3-45

-------
          A summary of the key criteria associated with these siting factors
for air monitoring stations is included in Table 19.   The information included
in that table should be used to the extent possible as a part of the
monitoring network design to ensure that the monitoring program provides
representative and unbiased data.   However, site-specific constraints could
make it very difficult to meet all  criteria.  For example, the occurrence of
wooded areas around a Superfund site would make the perimeter siting very
difficult, hence consideration should be given to the placement of stations
onsite and offsite to the extent possible.  Therefore, the use of the
information in Table 19, coupled with a balanced evaluation by an experienced
air quality and meteorology specialist is highly recommended.

          Air emissions for most of the applications involved with Superfund
sites are from ground level or near-ground-level releases.  For a site area
with no major obstructions and obstacles, the air sampler intake should be
about 2-3 meters aboveground.  For a site with nearby roadways, however,
intake placement should take into account the effects of road dust
reentrainment and vehicular emissions.  In fact, a linear relationship should
be established between the horizontal distance of the sampler intake from the
roadway and the aboveground elevation of that intake.  For any roadway
accommodating more than 3000 vehicles per day, the intake should be between 5
and 25 meters from the edge of the nearest traffic lane.  It should also be 15
meters aboveground for a distance of 5 meters from the nearest traffic lane
and 2 meters aboveground for a distance of 25 meters from the nearest lane.
For a roadway supporting less than 3000 vehicles per day, the intake should be
placed at a distance greater than 5 meters from the edge of the nearest
traffic lane and at a height of 2-15 meters aboveground.
                                      3-46

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 TABLE 19.   A SUMMARY OF KEY PROBE SITING  CRITERIA  FOR AIR  MONITORING  STATIONS
     Factor
                    Criteria
Vertical spacing above
ground
Horizontal spacing from
obstruction and obstacles
Unrestricted airflow
Spacing from roads
•  Representative of the breathing zone and
   avoiding effects of obstruction, obstacles,
   and roadway traffic.  Height of probe intake
   above ground i in general, 2-3 m above ground
   and 2-15 m above ground in the case of nearby
   roadways.

t  About 1 m or more above the structure where
   the sampler is located.

•  Minimum horizontal separation from
   obstructions such as trees is >20 m form the
   dripline and 10 m from the dripline when the
   trees act as an obstruction.

•  Distance from sampler inlet to an obstacle
   such as a building must be at least twice the
   height the obstacle protrudes above the
   sampler.

•  If a sampler is located on a roof or other
   structures, there must be a minimum of 2m
   separation from walls, parapets, penthouses,
   etc.

•  There must be sufficient separation between
   the sampler and a furnace or incinerator
   flue.  The separation distance depends on the
   height and the nature 'of the emissions
   involved.

•  Unrestricted airflow must exist in an arc of
   at least 270 degrees around the sampler, and
   the predominant wind direction for the
   monitoring period must be included in the 270
   degree arc.

t  A sufficient separation must exist between
   the sampler and nearby roadways to avoid the
   effect of dust re-entrainment and vehicular
   emissions on the measured air concentrations.

•  Sampler should be placed at a distance of 5-
   25 m from the edge of the nearest traffic
   lane on the roadway depending on the vertical
   placement of the sampler inlet which could be
   2-15 m above ground.
                                     3-47

-------
Determine Program Duration and Sampling Frequency

          The recommendations for program duration and frequency of monitoring
are summarized in Table 20.  Actual  monitoring duration and frequency,
however, will depend on the specific project objectives and resources.  It is
recommended that a representative number of air samples be collected during
each step of the project to ensure a reasonable data base.  The number of
representative samples depends on many factors, and a simple statistical
analysis may not provide a good basis for this number.  The recommendations
specified in Table 20 are based on the following factors:

          •    Augmentation of integrated sampling with continuous monitoring
               for steps that require more detailed data to enhance the data
               base;

          •    The resource requirements for laboratory analysis for organic
               and inorganic compounds; and

          •    Quality assurance/quality control requirements such as
               collocated field and trip blank samples and spike samples.

          Samples taken over a very short period (a minute or so) are not
representative of average air concentrations of air toxic constituents because
of the high variability that could occur over short periods of time.  For
screening monitoring, therefore, it is recommended that the samples taken be
averaged over at least 15 minutes and preferably over a longer period.

          The information presented in Table 20 provides general guidance and
should be tailored to the specific application.

Select Monitoring Methods and Equipment

          The selection of air monitoring methods and equipment should be
based on the consideration of a number of factors, including the following:
                                     3-48

-------
          TABLE 20.  PROGRAM DURATION AND FREQUENCY OF MONITORING AS A FUNCTION OF THE SUPERFUND PROJECT STEP
         Superfund  Step
   Monitoring
Program Duration
                                                                    Frequency
Sampling Duration
Number of Samples
10
         RI/FS  -  Screening APA
         •  Screening  Monitoring
        • Refined  screening
          monitoring
        RI/FS - Refined APA
        0 Refined Monitoring
      •1-2 days
     • 15-30 minutes at each
       sampling location.
      same as above     • 24-hour integrated.
      • 4-6 weeks
     • 24-hour integrated.
 • 20-30 readings using THC
   analyzers.

 • 10-20 samples using
   colorimetric gas detection
   tubes or equivalent.

 • 5-10 samples for organics in
   gas phase.

 • Limited QA/QC samples.
 • 10 at each monitoring
   location for organics in gas
   phase, semi-volatile
   organics and in-orgnaics in
   particulate phase.

 • 10 at the collocated
   monitoring location for the
   same constituents as above.

 • Field and trip blanks,
   spiked, spilt and surrogate
   samples on a case-by-case
   basis.
                                                                                                (Continued)

-------
                                               TABLE 20.   (Continued)
        Superfund Step
   Monitoring
Program Duration
                                                                    Frequency
Sampling Duration
Number of Samples
        Remedial  Design
        •  Refined Monitoring
      •3-12 months
        depending on
        the length of
        the pilot
        treatability
        study.
i
en
o
        •  Refined Screening
          Monitoring
      same as above
     • 24-hour integrated
     • 24-hour continuous
 • 10-30 at each monitoring
   location for organics in gas
   phase, semi-volatile
   organics and inorganics in
   particulate phase.

 • 10-30 at the collocated
   monitoring location for the
   same constituents as above.

 • Field and trip blanks,
   spiked, split, and surrogate
   samples, on a case-by-case
   basis.

 • Continuous at each of the
   designated monitoring
   locations for organics only.
                                                                                               (Continued)

-------
                                                TABLE 20.  (Continued)
        Superfund Step
   Monitoring
Program Duration
                                                                    Frequency
Sampling Duration
Number of Samples
        Remedial Action
        t Refined Monitoring
10

in
        • Refined screening
          monitoring
      t Several
        months to
        more than a
        year,
        depending on
        the length of
        the site
        clean-up.
      Same as  above
     • 24-hour integrated
     • 24-hour continuous
        • Screening Monitoring     Same as above     • 24-hour continuous
 • One sample every day" at
   each sampling location for
   organics in gas phase, semi-
   volatile organics and
   inorganics in particulate
   phase.

 • Same frequency as above for
   the collocated monitoring
   and for the same
   constituents as above.

 • Field and trip blanks,
   spikes, split and surrogate
   samples, on a case-by-case
   basis.

 • Continuous at each of the
   designated monitoring
   locations for organics only.

 • Continuous at each of the
   designated monitoring
   locations for inorganics and
   total hydrocarbons.
                                                                                               (Continued)

-------
                                                 TABLE  20.   (Continued)
         Superfund Step
   Monitoring
Program Duration
                                                                     Frequency
Sampling Duration
Number of Samples
         Operation and Maintenance
         •  Refined Monitoring
        Phase I  -  one
        year
     • 24-hour integrated
to
I
en
ro
         t  Refined  Monitoring
      • Phase II  -
        two to five
        years
     t 24-hour integrated
 t One sample every 12th day at
   each sampling location for
   organics in gas phase, semi-
   volatile organics, and
   inorganics in particulate
   phase.

 • Same frequency as above for
   the collocated monitoring &
   for the same constituents as
   above.

 t Field and trip blanks,
   spiked, split and surrogate
   samples, on a case-by-case
   basis.

 t Twleve samples per year for
   the same constituents as
   above.

 • Same frequency as above for
   the collocated monitoring
   and for the same
   constituents as above.

 • Field and trip blanks on a
   case-by-case basis.
           Frequency  should  be adjusted  based  on  results  of first  1  to  2  weeks  of sampling.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          •    Physical and chemical properties of compounds;
          t    Relative and absolute concentrations of compounds;
          •    Relative importance of various compounds in program objective;
          t    Method performance characteristics;
          •    Potential interferences present at site;
          •    Time resolution requirements; and
          •    Cost restraints.

          Various classes of contaminants must usually be monitored by
different methods, depending on the compounds and their physical/chemical
properties.  Another condition that affects the choice of monitoring technique
is whether the compound is primarily in the gaseous phase or is found adsorbed
to solid particles or aerosols.

          Screening for the presence of air constituents involves techniques
and equipment that are rapid, are portable, and can provide real-time
monitoring data.  Air contamination screening will generally be used to
confirm the presence of a release or to establish the extent of contamination
during the screening phase of the investigation.  Quantification of individual
compounds is not as important during screening as during initial and
additional air monitoring; however, the technique must have sufficient
specificity to differentiate hazardous constituents of concern from potential
interferences, even when the latter are present in higher concentrations.
Detection limits are ususally much higher for screening devices than for
quantitative methods.

          Laboratory analytical techniques are used to provide positive
identification of the components and the accurate and precise measurement of
concentrations.  This generally means that the preconcentration and/or storage
of air samples will  be required.   Therefore, methods chosen for refined
monitoring usually involve a longer analytical  time period, more sophisticated
equipment, and more rigorous QA procedures.  Turnaround time for data is a key
factor to evaluate when considering offsite analyses.
                                     3-53

-------
          The following list of references provides guidance on air monitoring
methodologies:

          •    U.S. EPA.  June 1983.  Technical  Assistance Document for
               Sampling and Analysis of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient
               Air.  EPA-600/4-83-027.  NTIS PB 83-239020.  Office of Research
               and Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

          •    U.S. EPA.  April 1984.  Compendium of Methods for the
               Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air.
               EPA-600/4-84-041.  Office of Research and Development.
               Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

          t    U.S. EPA.  September 1986.  Compendium of Methods for the
               Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air.
               EPA/600/4-87-006.  NTIS PB87-168696.  Office of Research and
               Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

          t    U.S. EPA.  June 1987.  Compendium Method TO-12:  Method for
               Determination of Non-Methane Organic Compounds (NMOC) in
               Ambient Air Using Cryogenic Preconcentration and Direct Flame
               lonization Detection (PDFID).  Research Triangle Park, NC
               27711.

          •    U.S. EPA.  May 1988.  Compendium Method TO-14:  The
               Determination of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) in Ambient
               Air Using SUMMAT Passivated Canister Sampling and Gas
               Chromatoqraphic Analysis.  Quality Assurance Division.
               Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

          •    NIOSH.  February 1984.  NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods.
               NTIS PB 85-179018.  National Institute for Occupational Safety
               and Health.  Cincinnati, OH  45226.
                                      3-54

-------
I
I
                    I*    U.S.  EPA.   September  1983.   Characterization  of  Hazardous  Waste
                        Sites -  A  Methods  Manual;   Volume  II. Available  Sampling
                        Methods.   EPA-600/4-83-040.   NTIS  PB 84-126929.  Office of
|                      Solid Waste.   Washington, DC  20460.
•                  •    U.S.  EPA.   September  1983.   Characterization  of  Hazardous  Waste
                        Sites -  A  Methods  Manual;   Volume  III. Available Laboratory
I
I
                        Analytical Methods.  EPA-600/4-83-040.  NTIS PB 84-126929.
                        Office of Solid Waste.  Washington, DC  20460.
I                  •     U.S.  EPA.   1986.   Test  Methods  for  Evaluating Solid Waste.   3rd
                         Edition.   EPA  SW-846.   GPO No.  955-001-00000-1.  Office  of
I                       Solid Waste.   Washington, DC  20460.

•                  •     ASTM.   1982.   Toxic Materials in the Atmosphere.  ASTM,  STP
"                       786.   Philadelphia, PA   19103.

•                  •     ASTM.   1980.   Sampling  and Analysis of Toxic Oraanics  in the
                         Atmosphere.  ASTM, STP  721.  Philadelphia, PA  19103.

                    t     ASTM.   1974.   Instrumentation for Monitoring Air Quality.
•                       ASTM,  SP 555.   Philadelphia, PA 19103.

•                  •     APHA.   1977.   Methods of Air Sampling and Analysis.  American
™                       Public Health  Association.  Washington, DC  20005.
                        ACGIH.   1983.  Air Sampling  Instruments for Evaluation of
                        Atmospheric Contaminants.  American Conference of Governmental
                        Industrial Hygienists.  Cincinnati, OH  45211.
I
I
I
                                               3-55

-------
          Recommended air monitoring methods are given in Table 21.  These
recommendations are based on typical Superfund site conditions and are a
function of APA sophistication level and Superfund activity.  Therefore,
alternative methods should be carefully considered and selected on a case-by-
case basis.  A summary of screening methods and their applicability to various
compound classes is presented in Table 22.  A listing of refined air
monitoring methods is included in Table 23.  Additional summaries of these
refined methods and associated equipment are presented in Tables 24 through
30.  A brief overview of emerging technologies (e.g., mobile mass spectrometry
and laser/infrared spectrometry) is presented in Table 31.  Until these
technologies are further developed, however, it is recommended that standard
air monitoring methods be selected for Superfund APA applications.

          A bibliography of air monitoring methods for sampling and analysis
is presented in Appendix A.  A list of commercially available equipment for
screening and refined screening monitoring is presented in Tables 32 and 33.
Refined monitoring systems generally require the purchase of many individual
components.  Therefore, a convenient summary of the numerous vendor
alternatives is not practical for this document.

3.4.5     Document Air Monitoring Plan

          The site/source-specific air monitoring plan should be documented to
facilitate the implementation of the selected monitoring .strategy.  A
recommended procedure for this phase is presented in Figure 15.

Required Documentation:  Quality Assurance Project Plan

          The EPA requires any project involving environmental measurement,
such as the air monitoring for toxic substances of Superfund sites, to prepare
a Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPP).  The QAPP, which is distinct from any
general project plan, describes the organization of the project and the
assignment of responsibility for those specific QA/QC activities required to
meet the projet DQOs.  A detailed description of the QAPP is given in the
following document:

                                     3-56

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          TABLE  21.   SUMMARY OF AIR MONITORING METHOD RECOMMENDATIONS
Activity    Monitoring Recommendations
                                    Objectives
RI/FS
• Screening
  - THC analyzers
  - Colorimetric gas
    detection tubes
                  • Refined Screening
                    - Portable field GC
                      Analyzer

                  • Refined
                    - whole air samplers
                      with GC/MS analysis
                      for indicator
                      compounds and for an
                      expended list
                      (samples split) of
                      compounds (TO-14).

                    - whole air samplers
                      for volatile
                      organics (TO-14).

                    - impingers if
                      necessary (TO-5,
                      TO-6, TO-8).

                    - PUF sampling as
                      necessary (TO-9).

                    - Hi-Vol  (PM-10) for
                      particulate matter
                      as  necessary (40  CFR
                      50,  Part J.
• Determine whether or not
  toxic air releases exist at
  the site and its perimeter
  using gross measurement
  techniques.

• Obtain qualitative
  information of on-site and
  off-site air toxic
  concentration for defining a
  more refined monitoring.

• Support refined monitoring
  and provide near realOtime
  data for site monitoring.

t Determine refined levels of
  air toxic concentrations on-
  site and at the site
  perimeter.

i Utilize these data to define
  air monitoring plan for the
  next Superfund step (if
  necessary).

• Assist in air quality data
  interpretation.

• Determine refined levels of
  toxic air contaminants on-
  site, at the site perimter,
  and off-site.

• Utilize results of the air
  monitoring in risk
  assessment for the no-action
  alternative and evaluating
  remedial  alternatives.

• Provide sufficient
  information for the design
  and implementation of
  remedial  action steps.
                                                            (Continued)
                                    3-57

-------
                            TABLE 21.  (Continued)
Activity    Monitoring Recommendations
                                    Objectives
Remedial
Design
Remedial
Action
• Refined
  - Whole air samplers
    for volatile organic
    (TO-14).

  - impingers if
    necessary (TO-5,
    TO-6, TO-8).

  - PUF sampling as
    necessary for semi-
    volatile organics
    (TO-9).

  - Hi-Vols (PM-10) for
    particulate matter
    as necessary (40 CFR
    50, Part J).

• Refined Screening
  - Portable field GC
    analyzer.

t Refined
  - Whole air samplers
    for volatile organic
    (TO-14).

  - impingers if
    necessary (TO-5,
    TO-6, TO-8).

  - PUF sampling as
    necessary for semi-
    volatile organics
    (TO-9).

  - Hi-Vols (PM-10) for
    particulate matter
    as necessary (40 CFR
    50, Part J).
• Determine the effects of
  pilot treatability study and
  ambient air quality and make
  use of the data in the
  design of the Implementation
  of remedial action step.
• Support refined monitoring
  and provide near-realtime
  data for site monitoring.

• Provide data in support of
  protecting public health and
  the environment as well as
  on-site workers under
  routine and non-routine
  releases.
                                                            (Continued)
                                     3-58

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                            TABLE 21.  (Continued)
Activity    Monitoring Recommendations
                                    Objectives
Remedial
Action
(Continued)
Operation
and
Maintenance
• Refined screening
  - portable field GC
    analyzer.
                  • Screening
                    - Electrochemical
                      alarm cells.
• Refined
  - whole air samplers
    for volatile
    organics (TO-14).

  - impingers as
    necessary (TO-5,
    TO-6, TO-8).

  - PUF samplers as
    necessary for semi-
    volatile organics
    (TO-9).

  - Hi-Vol (PM-10) for
    particulate matter
    as necessary (40 CFR
    50, Part J).
• Provide near-realtime data
  1n support of protecting
  public health and the
  environment as well as on-
  site workers under routine
  and non-routine releases.

t Provide near-realtime data
  in support of protecting on-
  site workers and sufficient
  information for protecting
  public health and the
  environment in case of non-
  routine release.

t Assess the long-term effect
  of the remedial action on
  public health and
  environment.
                                     3-59

-------
                                    TABLE  22.   SUMMARY OF SCREENING TECHNIQUES  FOR  DETECTION OF ORGANIC
                                               AND INORGANIC COMPOUNDS  IN AMBIENT AIR
OJ
 I






Compound Class (Ref. Table 9)
A. Volatile Orqanlcs
1. Allphatics
2. Aromatics
3. Halogenated Species
4. Oxygenated species
5. Sulfur-containing species
6. Nitrogen-containing species
B. Volatile Inorganics
1. Acid gases
2. Sulfur-Containing species
C. Semi-Volatile Orqanics
1. Phenols
2. Esters
3. Chlorinated benzenes
4. Amines
5. Pesticides Ethers
6. Alkadienes
7. Miscellaneous alphatics
and aromatics
8. Polynuclear aromatic
hydrocarbons
9. Pesticides
lO.Polychlorinated byphenyls
(PCBs)
Aoolicable Methods (Reference Table 3)
Total Hydrocarbon
Analyzers Colorimetric Methods Electrochemical Portable GC Analyzers Portable
Detectors and Pumps &
Gas Continuous Alarms Filters
. Detection Flow Tape PID &
Fid1 Infrared Tubes Colorimeter Monitor GC/FID GC/PID GC/ECD GC/FPD

x x
x x x£ x xx1*
x x xx4
XXX X
XX XX
XXX XX

x x xHCH x5
xxx

XX XX
XX XX
x x' xx
XX XXX
XX XX
X XX
x x

xx xx

x xx
x x

                                                                                                (Continued)

-------
                                                                  TABLE  22.    (Continued)
                                                                                          Applicable Methods (Reference Table 3)
                                           Total Hydrocarbon
                                               Analyzers
                                                       Colorimetric Methods
                                                                 Gas     Continuous
                                              .                Detection      Flow       Tape
           Compound Class  (Ref. Table 9)   Fid     Infrared     Tubes    Colorimeter  Monitor
Electrochemical
 Detectors and
     Alarms
Portable 6C Analyzers
                                                                                                            PID &
                                                                                                    GC/FID  GC/PID  GC/ECD  GC/FPD
Portable
Pumps &
Filters
            0.  Non-Volatiles

            1.  Inorganics metals
               and nonmetals
           Abbreviations:  FID = Flame ionization detector
                           PID = Photoionization detector
                           FPD = Flame photometric detector
                                                                             GC = Gas chromatograph
                                                                             ECD= Electron capture detector
OJ

en
  FID alone will not distinguish between categories of compounds.  An "x" in this column means that the category is measured along  with all
  other categories.
p
  Colorimetric gas detection tubes may not be applicable to every compound in a given category.  COnsult manufacturer's information for
  specific applicability.

  Where more than one GC or total hydrocarbon detector method is listed, "xx" indicates a preferred method.

  As an option for halogenated species, the ECD may be used in conjunction with a Hall detector or PID for more accurate identification of
  compounds.

  Pump/filter methods are applicable  to parttculate species in the indicated categories.

  Mercaptans may be detected using FID or  infrared methods.
             For chlorobenzenes, if a PID is used,  it  should be used In  conjunction with an ECD.

-------
     TABLE 23.  A SUMMARY OF REFINED SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES FOR
                ORGANICS AND INORGANICS IN AIR
         Technique
  Method No.
       Type of Compounds
I. Organic Compounds:

Traps

• Sorption onto Tenax GC
  packed cartridges using low
  volume pump and GC/MS
  analysis.
• Sorption onto carbon
  molecular sieve packed
  cartridge using low volume
  pump and GC/MS analyses
• Cryogenic trapping of
  analytes in the field and
  GC/FID or ECD analyses.

• Sorption onto polyurethane
  (PUF) using low volume or
  high volume pump and GC/ECD
  analysis.

• Sorption onto Thermosorb/N
  packed cartridges using  low
  volume pump GC/MS analysis.

• Sorption onto PUF using  low
  volume or high volume pump
  and high resolution Gas
  Chromatography/High
  Resolution Mass Spectrometry
  (HRGC/HRMS).
TO-1
TO-2
                                 TO-3
TO-4
TO-7
TO-9
• Volatile, nonpolar organic
  (e.g., aromatic hydro-
  carbons, chlorinated hydro-
  carbons) having boiling
  points in the range of 80°
  to 200eC, in gas or vapor
  phase.

• Highly volatile, nonpolar
  organics (e.g., vinyl
  chloride, vinylidene
  chloride, benzene, toluene)
  having boiling points in the
  range of -15* to +120*C, in
  gas or vapor phase.

• Volatile, nonpolar organics
  having boiling points in the
  range of -10° to +200°C, in
  gas or vapor phase.

t Organochlorine pesticides
  and PCBs, in particulate
  phase.
• N-Nitrosodimethylamine in
  gas phase.
t Dioxin
                                                                 (Continued)
                                     3-62

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                            TABLE 23.  (Continued)
         Technique
Method No.
Type of Compounds
Whole Air Samplers

• Whole air samples are          TO-14
  collected in a SUMMA®
  passivated stainless steel
  canister and high resolution
  GC coupled with mass
  specified spectrometer (GC
  MS-SIM or GC-MS-Scan).

• Whole air samples extracted    TO-12
  directly from ambient air
  and analyzed using cryogenic
  preconcentration and direct
  flame ionization detector
  (PDFID), or air samples are
  collected in a canister and
  analyzed by PDFID.

• Whole air samples are          Modified
  collected in Tedlar® bags      TO-3 or
  and subject to GC/FID or BCD   TO-14
  analysis or high resolution
  GC compiled with MS-SIM or
  MS-SCAN.

• Liquid Impingers

t Dinitrophenylhydrazine         TO-5
  Liquid Impinger sampling
  using a low volume pump and
  High Performance Liquid
  Chromatography/UV analysis.

• Aniline liquid impinger        TO-6
  sampling using a low volume
  pump and HPLC analysis.

• Sodium Hydroxide Liquid        TO-8
  impinger sampling using a
  low volume pump and HPLC
  analysis.
             • Volatile, nonpolar organic
               (e.g., aromatic
               hydrocarbons) chlorinated
               hydrocarbons having boiling
               points of -30°C to about
               215°C.
             • Non-methane organic
               compounds (NMOC).
             • TO-14 or TO-3 compounds.
             • Aldehydes and ketones
             • Phosgene
             • Cresol/phenol
                                                                 (Continued)
                                     3-63

-------
                            TABLE 23.   (Continued)
         Technique
  Method No.
       Type of Compounds
II.  Inorganic Compounds:

Filter Samplers

• High-volume sampler and
  Atomic Absorption (AA) or
  Inductive Coupled Plasma
  (ICP).

• PM-10 high volume sampler
  and AA or ICP
• High-volume sampler
t PM-10 high-volume sampler
40 CFR Part
50.7
Appendix B.
40 CFR part
50. Appendix
J (for
sampling
Methodology
only).

40 CFR Part
50.11

40 CFR Part
50.
Appendix J
• Metals in particulate phase.
• Inhalable metals in
  particulate phase (up to 10
  microns in diameter).
Total suspended particulate
(TSP)

• Inhalable particulate up to
  10 microns in diameter.
                                     3-64

-------
                     TABLE  24.   SUMMARY  OF SAMPLING AND  ANALYTICAL METHODS  FOR REFINED  MONITORING  FOR  ORGANIC
                                    AND INORGANIC COMPOUNDS  IN  AMBIENT AIR  VOLATILE AROMATICS1
         Sampling and Analysis Approach
                                           Method
                                         Designation
            Detection
              Limit      Accuracy    Precision3
                 Advantages
                             Disadvantages
         CRYOGENIC PRECONCENTRATION/GC/FID/EC -
         Vapor phase organics are condensed in a
         cryogenic trap.  Carrier gas transfers
         the condensed sample to a GC column.
         Adosrbed compounds are eluted from the GC
         column and measured by FID or EC
         detectors.
                                            TO-3        0.1 ppbv    90-110%     ±15%        • Collects wide variety
                                                        (100 ml                               of volatile organic
                                                        sample)                               compounds.

                                                                                            • Standard procedures
                                                                                              are available.

                                                                                            • Contaminants common to
                                                                                              adsorbent materials
                                                                                              are avoided.

                                                                                            • Low blanks
                                                                              Moisture  levels In air
                                                                              can cause freezing
                                                                              problems.

                                                                              Difficult to use in
                                                                              field.

                                                                              Expensive.
CO
 i
en
CARBON MOLECULAR SIEVE ADSORPTION AND
G/NS OR GC/FID - Selected volatile
organic compounds are captured on carbon
molecular sieve adsorbents.  Compounds
are thermally desorbed and analyzed by
GC/MS techniques.
TO-2        1-200       70-95%      ±10-40%     • Trace levels of
            pptv        (biased                   volatile organic
            (20 ml       low)                       compounds are
            sample)                                collected and
                                                  concentrated on
                                                  sorbent material.

                                                • Atmospheric moisture
                                                  not collected.
                                                                                                                                   Some trace levels of
                                                                                                                                   organic species are
                                                                                                                                   difficult to recover
                                                                                                                                   from the sorbent.
         TENAX GC ADSORPTION AND GC/KS OR GC/FID
         Ambient air  is drawn through organic
         polymer sorbent where certain compounds
         are  trapped.  The cartridge is
         transferred  to the laboratory for
         analysis.  Using GC/MS or GC/FID.
                                            TO-1
            .01-1
            ppbv
            (20 ml
            sample)
                                                                    80-100%
±20%
Good volume of air can
be sampled.

Water vapor Is not
collected.

Wide variety of
compounds collected.

Standard procedures
available.
                                                                                                                          Highly volatile
                                                                                                                          compounds  and certain
                                                                                                                          polar compounds are not
                                                                                                                          collected.

                                                                                                                          Rigorous clean-up
                                                                                                                          required.

                                                                                                                          No possibility of
                                                                                                                          multiple analysis.

                                                                                                                          Low breakthrough
                                                                                                                          volumes for some
                                                                                                                          compounds.
                                                                                                                                           (Continued)

-------
                                                                    TABLE 24.   (Continued)
Method
Sampling and Analysis Approach Designation
SUHHA* PASSIVATED CANISTER AND 6C/FID/ECD TO-14
or GC/MS - Whole air samples are
collected In an evacuated stainless steel
canister. VOCs are concentrated In the
laboratory with cryogen trap. VOCs are
revolatllized, separated on a GC column,
and passed to one or more detectors for
Identification and quantitation.
Detection
Limit
0.5-4
ppb
Accuracy2 Precision3 Advantages
90-100X ±10% • Best method for broad
spec iat Ion of unknown
trace volatile
organ Ics.
• Simple sampling
approach.
Disadvantages
• Sample components may
be adsorbed or
decompose through
interaction with
container walls.
• Condensation may be a
problem at high
concentrations (ppm).
                                                                                                                                      Copmlex equipment
                                                                                                                                      preparation required.
CO
 i
cr>
1 See Table 3-6 for listing of analytes.


2 Accuracy - The agreement of an analytical measurement with a true or accepted value.   Values  int  his table are expressed as Percent  Recovery

  (%R = Measured Value/True Value x 100).


3 Precision - The reproduclbllity of repeated measurement of the same property usually  made under prescribed conditions.   Values In  this table are

  expressed as Relative Percent Difference (RPD = Range/Mean x 100).

-------
                      TABLE 25.    SUMMARY  OF  SAMPLING  AND  ANALYTICAL METHODS  FOR REFINED MONITORING FOR ORGANIC
                                     AND  INORGANIC  COMPOUNDS  IN  AMBIENT AIR  VOLATILE HALOGENATED HYDROCARBONS1
CO
 I
CT>
Method
Sampling and Analysis Approach Designation
TENAX GC ADSORPTION AND GC/NS OR GC/ECD - TO-1
Ambient air is drawn through a cartridge
containing Tenax where certain volatile
organic compounds are adsorbed.
Compounds are transferred by programmed
thermal desorption into a GC and detected
by MS or ECD.




Detection
Limit Accuracy Precision Advantages
.01-1 80-100% ±20% • Moisture is not
ppb collected
• Large sample volume
can be concentrated.
• Documented standard
procedures available
with extensive QA/QC
database
• Practical for field
use
• Low detection limits
Disadvantages
• Contamination problems
possible.

• Artifact formation
problems.

• Rigorous clean-up
requ 1 red .

• No possibility of
multiple analyses
CARBON MOLECULAR SIEVE ADSORPTION AND         TO-2         1-200        70-95%      ±10-40%
GC/MS OR GC/ECD - Ambient air is drawn                    pptv
through a cartridge containing carbon                     (20 ml
molecular sieve where highly volatile                     sample)
compounds are adsorbed.  Compounds are
thermally desorbed to a GC where they are
quantitatively measured using MS or EC
detectors.

CRYOGENIC TRAPPING AND GC/ECD - Vapor         TO-3         0.1 ppbv     90-110%     ±10%
phase organics are condensed in a                        (100 ml
cryogenic trap.   Carrier gas transfers                    sample)
the condensed sample to a GC column.
Adsorbed compounds are eluted from the GC
column and determined by MS or EC
detectors.
Efficient collection
of polar compounds.
Wide range of
application
Highly volatile
compounds are adsorbed
Easy to use  In field.
                                                                                                       Large database
                                                                                                       Excellent long-term
                                                                                                       storage
                                                                                                       Wide applicability
                                                                                                       Allows multiple
                                                                                                       analyses
                                                                                                       Best method for broad
                                                                                                       special ion of unknown
                                                                                                       VOCs
                                                                                                       Easy sample collection
                                                                                                       Consistent recoveries
Low breakthrough
volumes for some
compounds.

Water collected and can
de-activate adsorption
sites.

Thermal desorption of
compounds may be
difficult.
                          • Moisture condensation

                          • Integrated sampling  is
                            difficult
          1 See Table 3-6 for listing of analytes.
          y
           Accuracy - The agreement of an analytical measurement with a true or accepted value.  Values in this table are expressed as Percent Recovery
           (%R * Measured Value/True Value x 100).

           Precision - The reproducibillty of repeated measurement of the same property usually made under prescribed conditions.   Values In this table are
           expressed as Relative Percent Difference (RPO = Range/Mean x 100).

-------
OO
                      TABLE  26.   SUMMARY OF SAMPLING  AND  ANALYTICAL  METHODS FOR REFINED MONITORING  FOR ORGANIC
                                    AND  INORGANIC COMPOUNDS  IN  AMBIENT  AIR VOLATILE  OXYGENATES1
Sampling and Analysis Approach
SUHMA PASSIVATED CANISTER AND GC/FID/EC
OR GC/PID/EC OR GC/MS - Whole air samples
are collected in an evacuated stainless
steel canister. VOCs are concentrated in
the laboratory with cryogen trap. VOCs
are revolatized, separated on a GC column
and passed to one or more detectors for
identification and quantification.

Method
Designation
TO- 14

TO-3






Detection
Limit
0.5-20
ppb
0.5-20
ppb





? o
Accuracy Precision Advantages
90-110% ±10% • Low cost
• High sensitivity
90-110% ±20% • Positive compound ID






Disadvantages
• Calibration time
consuming

• Compound Identification
is not absolute

• Low sensitivity

• Expensive
          Air sample Is drawn through                  TO-5
          dinitrophenylhydrazine impinger solution
          using a low volume pump.   The solution  is
          analyzed using HPLC with  a UV detector.
Air stream  is drawn through a Tenax          TO-1
cartridge and adsorbed to it.  Desorption
from Tenax  is by thermal desorption  to
GC/MS or GC/FID.
                                                      1-5 ppbv    80-120%
                                                                1-5 ppbv     75-125%
±10%        •  Specific for aldehydes
              and ketones

            •  Good stability for
              derivative compounds
              formed

            •  Low detection limits

±15-20%      •  Collect and
              concentrate large
              volume sample with
              trace concentration.

            •  Moisture Is not a
              problem.

            •  Broad use-reference
              methods

            *  Low detection limit

            •  Easy to use in field
Sensitivity limited by
reagent priority.

Potential for
evaporation of liquid
over long term.
Blank contaminants may
be a problem

Single analysis per
sample

Artifact formations
with time
                                                                                                                                         (Continued)

-------
                                                                      TABLE  26.   (Continued)
Sampling and Analysis Approach
Method
Designation
Detection
Limit
Accuracy
Precision3
Advantages
Disadvantages
           Collection of whole air samples  in  SUMMA*
           passivated stainless steel  canisters.
           VOCs are separated by GC methods and
           measured by MS or multi-detector
           techniques
TO-14
1 ppbv
                                                   Must calibrate
                                                   separate detectors

                                                   Compound ident-
                                                   ification not
                                                   positive.  Lengthy
                                                   data interpretation.
                                                   Does not differentiate
                                                   targeted compounds
                                                   from interfering
                                                   compounds.
• Equipment expensive

• Operator skill  level
  important.
oo
 i
10
           1
             See Table 3-6 for listing  of analytes.

             Accuracy - The agreement of an analytical measurement with a true or accepted value.  Values  int his table are expressed as Percent Recovery
             (%R = Measured Value/True  Value x 100).

             Precision - The reproduclbllity of repeated measurement of the same property usually made under prescribed conditions.  Values In this table are
             expressed as Relative  Percent Difference (RPD = Range/Mean x 100).

-------
CO
 i
—i
o
                     TABLE  27.   SUMMARY  OF SAMPLING AND ANALYTICAL  METHODS FOR REFINED  MONITORING  FOR  ORGANIC
                                   AND  INORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT  AIR SEMI-VOLATILE PHENOLICS1
Sampling and Analysis Approach
SODIUM HYDROXIDE LIQUID IMPINGER AND
HPLC/UV - Ambient air is drawn through
Method
Designation
TO-8
Detection
Limit
1 ppb
p
Accuracy
75-125%
Precision3
±20%
Advantages
• 4.6-din1tro-2-
methylphenol (50/1600)
Disadvantages
• Subject to
Interferences
         two midget impingers.   Phenols are
         trapped as phenolates  in NaOH solution
         and analyzed by HPLC.
         ADSORPTION OF TENAX AND 6C/FID OR GC/MS -
         Ambient air is drawn through organic
         polymer sorbent where certain organic
         compounds are trapped.  The cartridge is
         transferred to the laboratory for
         analysis.  Compounds are desorbed by
         heating.
         HIGH VOLUME PUF/TENAX SAMPLER AND
         GC/ECD - Sorption onto PUF.
TO-1
1-200
ppt
70-95%
±10-40%
TO-4
0.2-2
ng/nr
60-100%
±20%
  specific  to class of
  compounds.

• Good stability.

• Detect  non-volatile as
  well as volatile
  compounds.

• Good QA/QC database

• Wide range of
  application

• Easy to use in field.
  Wide range of
  application

  Easy to  use - low
  blanks

  Excellent collection
  and retention
  efficiencies
                                                                           • Limited sensitivity
• Desorption of some
  compounds difficult

• Blank contamination
  possible

* Artifact formation on
  adsorbent

• High humldy reduces
  collection efficiency

• Possibility of
  contamination.
         1 See Table 3-6 for  listing of analytes.
         p
          Accuracy - The agreement of an analytical measurement with a true or accepted value.  Values int his  table are expressed as Percent Recovery
          (%R = Measured Value/True Value x 100).

          Precision - The reproduclbillty of repeated measurement of the same property usually made under prescribed conditions.   Values in this table are
          expressed as Relative Percent Difference (RPD = Range/Mean x 100).

-------
                     TABLE 28.   SUMMARY  OF  SAMPLING AND ANALYTICAL METHODS  FOR  REFINED  MONITORING  FOR ORGANIC
                                   AND  INORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN  AMBIENT AIR SEMI-VOLATILE BASE/NEUTRAL  EXTRACTS1
         Sampling and Analysis Approach
   Method       Detection
Designation      Limit      Accuracy    Precision        Advantages
Disadvantages
HIGH VOL GFF AND PUF FILTERS AND TO-4
6C/FID/ECD OR GC/MS - Participates
filtered in field and solvent extracted
In lab. Analyzed by GC/MS.
0.2-200 28-85% ±15%
ng/m
• Effective for broad
range of compounds
• Easy to preclean and
• Possible contamination
• Loss of volatile
organ Ics during storage
         HIGH VOL. XAD-2 RESIN - Particulates         TO-4        0.2-200
         filtered from ambient air with  low or hi      (modifi-    ng/m
         vol  filter.  Filters solvent extracted       cation)
         and  analses completed using GC/MS.
                                                   extract

                                                  • Low blanks

                          80-120%     ±15%        • Effective for broad
                                                   range of compounds.

                                                  • Easy to clean

                                                  • Broad database

                                                  • Good retention of
                                                   compounds
CO
         1  See Table 3-6 for  listing of analytes.

           Accuracy - The agreement of an analytical measurement with a true or accepted value.  Values  int his table are expressed as Percent Recovery
           (%R = Measured Value/True Value x 100).

           Precision - The reproduclbllity of repeated measurement of the  same property usually made under prescribed conditions.  Values in this table are
           expressed as Relative Percent Difference (RPD = Range/Mean x 100).

-------
                   TABLE 29.   SUMMARY OF SAMPLING AND ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR REFINED MONITORING FOR ORGANIC
                                 AND  INORGANIC  COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR SEMI-VOLATILE PESTICIDES/PCBs1
Sampling and Analysis Approach
HIGH VOL GLASS FIBER AND PUF FILTERS AND
GC/ECD -Particulates collected on
filters. Compounds solvent extracted and
analyzed using GC/ECD.
Method
Designation
TO-4
Detection
Limit
0.2-200
ng/mj
o
Accuracy
28 to
B5-100X
Precision Advantages
±15% • Broad range of
application
• Low blanks
Disadvantages
• Can lose volatile
compounds in storage
• Possibility of
contamination
        HIGH VOL GLASS FIBER FILTER AND XAD-2
        RESIN TO FILTER AND ADSORB PARTICULATES
TO-4
(modifi-
cation)
0.2-200
ng/mj
80-120%
±20%
Easy to use

Reusable

High sensitivity

Can analyze broad
range of compounds
(more efficient than
PUF).
to        See Table 3-6 for listing of analytes.

ro      ' Accuracy - The agreement of an analytical measurement with a true or accepted value.  Values int his table are expressed as Percent  Recovery
          (%R = Measured Value/True Value x 100).
          Precision - The  reproduclbility of repeated measurement of the same property usually made under prescribed conditions.   Values in this table are
          expressed as Relative Percent Difference (RPO * Range/Mean x 100).

-------
tO
 I
--4
to
                    TABLE 30.   SUMMARY  OF SAMPLING AND ANALYTICAL  METHODS  FOR  REFINED MONITORING FOR  ORGANIC
                                 AND INORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT  AIR  VOLATILE IN-ORGANICS1
Method
Sampling and Analysis Approach Designation
HIGH VOL GFF AND AA/ICP - Particulates TO-4
are removed from air stream with a GFF or
PDF filter, dissolved and analyzed by
spectrometric methods.
VAPOR PHASE METALS (Sb, As. Pb. N1. Se.
Ag. Hg) INPINGER AND AA/6FA - Collection
of vapor phase metals on sorbents and in
impinger solutions.

VAPOR PHASE CN - HCEF and Sodium TO-8/
Hydroxide Liquid Impinger ISP/EP
A 335.1
or .3
Detection
Limit
1-5,
ng/nr
1-5
ng/m

1-5
ng/mj
2 Q
Accuracy Precision Advantages
±25% ±10% • Wide range of
applications
• Standard methods
• Low detection limits
• Standard methods
• High sensitivity
• QA/QC database
available
• Spediflc method for
each metal
• Standard methods for
each metal
Disadvantages

• Possible breakthrough
• High blanks
• Interferences

• Potential interferences
          See Table 3-6 for listing of analytes.

        y
          Accuracy - The agreement of an analytical measurement with a true or accepted value.  Values int his table are expressed as Percent Recovery
          (%R = Measured Value/True Value x 100).


          Precision - The reproduclblllty of repeated measurement of the same property usually made under prescribed conditions.  Values  In this table are
          expressed as Relative Percent Difference (RPD = Range/Mean x 100).

-------
                    TABLE  31.   SUMMARY OF SAMPLING  AND ANALYTICAL METHODS  FOR REFINED MONITORING  FOR ORGANIC
                                  AND  INORGANIC COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT AIR  DEVELOPING TECHNOLOGIES1
        Sampling and Analysis Approach
   Method       Detection
Designation       Limit      Accuracy   Precision        Advantages
                                                                 Disadvantages
CO
 i
        MOBILE MASS SPECTROMETER (MS/MS.
        MS/MS/MS) OR (6C/MS)
        LONG PATH OPTICAL ABSORPTION - B1-static
        open air  transmission of  broadband
        radiation is used to obtain spectra of
        trace gases in ambient air.  Specialized
        systems are available for both the
        infrared  and ultraviolet  spectral
        regions.  Laser-based systems also are
        available for more restricted
        applications.
    None
1 ppb
    None
2 ppb
• Compound  identi-
  fication  in complex
  mixtures.

• Direct  sampling

• Field operation

• Direct  Field
  measurements

• Minimum time
  requ1rement

• No sampling required

• Llne-of-sight
  coverage.
                                                                              • Expensive
                                                                              • Skilled operators
                                                                              • Low sensitivity
        1  See  Table 3-6 for listing of analytes.

          Accuracy - The agreement of an analytical measurement with a true  or accepted value.  Values int his table are expressed as Percent  Recovery
          (%fi  = Measured Value/True Value x 100).

        3  Precision - The reproducibillty of repeated measurement of the same property usually made under prescribed conditions.  Values In this table are
          expressed as Relative  Percent Difference (RPD = Range/Mean x 100).

-------
                  TABLE 32.   TYPICAL  COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE  SCREENING MONITORING AND ANALYSIS EQUIPMENT
                 	FOR ORGANICS AND INORGANICS IN AIR*
         Technique
                                          Approximate
 Manufacturers     Compounds Detected   Detection Limit
                                             Comments
co
 i
         1. THC Analyzers

            FID (Total
            Hydrocarbon
            Analyzer)
            Infrared
            Analysis
         2. Col orimetric
            Gas Detection
            Tubes and
            Monitors

            Gas Detection
            Tubes
            Continuous Flow
            Colorimeter
Beckman MSA, Inc.
Thermo Electron,
Inc.
Foxboro/Wilkes
Draeger, Matheson,
Kitagawa
CEA Instruments,
Inc.
Most organics
Most organics
Varous organics
and inorganics
Acrylonitrile,
formaldehyde,
phosgene, and
various organics
0.5 ppmv
1-10 ppmv
0.1 to 1 ppmv
0.05 to 0.5 ppmv
Does not repond
uniformly to most
organic compounds
on carbon basis.

Some inorganic
gases (HJD,  CO)
will be detected
and tehrefore are
potential inter-
ferences.
Highly subject to
interference,
sensitivity and
selectivity highly
dependent on
compound of
interest.

Sensitivity and
selectivity
similar to
detector tubes.
                                                                                                   (Continued)

-------
                                               TABLE 32.  (Continued)
       Technique
                      Manufacturers
                       Approximate
Compounds Detected   Detection Limit
                        Comments
CO
I
en
          Colorimetric
          Tape Monitor
       3. Electrochemical
          alarm cells
4. Portable GC**
   Analyzers

   GC/FID
   (portable)
                     KHDA Scientific
                     Foxboro, MSA,  CEA
                     Instruments,
                     Sensidyne
                            Foxboro/Century,
                            Thermo Electron,
                            Inc.
  Toluene, di-
  isocyanate,
  dinitro toluene,
  phosgene, and
  various inorganics

  Wide range of
  inorganics, also
  combustion gases
  Most organics
  except that polar
  compounds may not
  elute from the
  column.
0.05-0.5 ppmv
ppmv
0.5 ppbv
Same as above.
Quantitative
information for a
single compound by
each cell.
Requires an array
of cells.
Qualitative as
well as
quantitative
information
obtained, does not
respond uniformly
to organic
compounds.
                                                                                                 (Continued)

-------
                                                TABLE 32.  (Continued)
        Technique
                   Manufacturers
                       Approximate
Compounds Detected   Detection Limit
                        Comments
CO
 I
           PID and GC/PID
           (portable)
           GC/ECD
           (portable)
GC/FPD
(portable)
        5. Portable pumps
           and filters
                  HNU, Inc.
                  Photovac, Inc.
                  Thermo
                  Environmental
                  Instruments, Inc.
                  Thermo Electron,
                  Inc.
                             Thermo Electron,
                             Inc.
                  Gilian Instrument
                  Corporation, SKC,
                  Inc., Millipore,
                  Inc.
  Most organic
  compounds can be
  detected with the
  exception of
  methane
  Halogenated and
  nitro-substituted
  compounds.
  Sulfur or
  phosphorus-
  containing
  compounds
  Inorganics
  particulates and
  semi-volatile
  particulates
0.1 to 100 ppbv
0.1 to 100 ppbv
10-100 ppbv
100 ppbv-1 ppmv
Selectivity can be
adjusted by
selection of lamp
energy.  Aromatics
most readily
detected.

Response varies
widely from
compound to
compound.

Both inorganic and
organic sulfur or
phosphorus
compounds will be
detected.

Special sorbent
plugs have to be
used to collect
semi-volatiles.
        * based on Riggins, 1983.
        GC = Gas Chromatograph
        PID = Photoionization Detector
        FPD = Flame Photometric Detector
                                                     **Classified as a refined screening technique,
                                                     FID » Flame lonization Detector
                                                     ECD « Electron Capture Detector

-------
            TABLE 33.   SUMMARY  OF  REFINED SCREENING MONITORING EQUIPMENT  FOR  ORGANIC  COMPOUNDS IN AMBIENT  AIR
              Sampling and
            Analysis Approach
  Manufacturer
Detection Limit
   Precision
 Mode of
Operation
Advantages and Disadvantages
oo
 i
00
         Scentoqraph PC operated
         portable GC analyzer
         utilizing Argon
         ionizatIon/electron
         capture detector (ECD)
         with optional photo-
         ionization detector.
         preconcentrator and a
         heated column with
         temperature adjustable  to
         140'C. Up to 16 different
         compounds can be
         processed at any time.
         Library is up to 100
         compounds.  On-going
         calibration Is by
         injecting standard
         calibration gas.
Sentex Sensing
Technology
Low ppb range
when operated as
ambient air
monitor.
About 5-10% high
reproducibllity.
Realtime
Intermittent.
Automatic
sampling at  5-15
minute Intervals
depending on
operating
parameters.
Advantages:
• Near real time continuous
  concentrations of air
  toxic constituents.

• Good accuracy and low
  detection limit for  a
  field technique.

• Eliminates in-accuracies
  associated with the
  handling of samples
  obtained by integrator
  samplers that have to be
  shipped for laboratory
  analysis.

* Has an option for more
  than one detector.

Disadvantages:
• Can analyze only a limited
  number of air toxic
  constituents at a time.

• Subject to Inaccuracies
  Introduced by field
  conditions and field
  operators.
                                                                                                                                      (Continued)

-------
                                                       TABLE  33.    (Continued)
      Sampling  and
    Analysis  Approach
  Manufacturer
Detection Limit
   Precision
 Mode of
Operation
                                                                                                                Advantages and Dlsadvantaaes
 Photovac Model  10S70
 portable GC  analyzer
 utilizing photo1onizatIon
 detector (PIO)  with a
 range of 5 different
 energy  lamps to provide
 selectivity  for different
 chemical groups,
 isothermal oven control
 for  the  multi capilarry
 column.   Up  to  25
 compounds can be
 processed at any time.
 Includes 4 libraries of
 25 compounds each.
 Calibration  is  by
 injecting standard
 calibration  gas.
HNU Model 301DP or 311
portable GC analyzer.
The 301PD model can
utilize either a PID or
FID and the 311 model can
utilize a PID only.
Includes isothermal
temperature control of up
to 300'C for the 301PD
model and up to about
200'C for the 311 model.
Calibrate with either the
compounds of Interest or
with a reference
compound. Up to 20
compounds can be
processed at any time.
Photovac, Inc.
HNU Systems,
Inc.
0.1 to several
ppb for sub-
stituted
benzenes and
haloethylenes.
1 ppm for
saturated
haloalkanes.
About 5-10% high
reproducibility.
Realtime
intermittent.
Automatic
sampling is 5-15
minute Intervals
depending on
operating
parameters.
0.1 to several
ppb depending on
the number of
compounds
Involved and the
mix.
Not readily
available but
expected to be
in the same
range as above.
real time
continuous
Advantages:
• Similar to the ones
  mentioned above with the
  exception that It uses
  only one detector.

Disadvantages:
• Similar to the ones
  mentioned above with the
  addition of:

  —Isothermal oven control
  Is  up to 50*C.  This GC
  cannot operate at higher
  temperatures.  This
  reduces the range of
  volatile organics that can
  be  analyzed.  Useful
  mainly for high volatile
  organics.

  —Cannot use detectors
  other than the PID.

Advantages:
• Similar to the ones above
  for the 301PD model.

• Similar to the ones above
  for the 311 model with the
  exception that It uses
  only one detector.

Disadvantages:
• Similar to ones listed for
  the Scentograph GC.

With the addition  of:
• No  temperature
  adjustments.

• No  library for retention
  times.

-------
MONITORING
CONSTITUENTS
TARGET LIST

METEOROLOGICAL
MONITORING
PROGRAM DESIGN



i


AIR MONITORING
NETWORK DESIGN

MONITORING
SOPHISTICATION
LEVEL
(STEP 2)

                PREPARE AIR
             MONITORING  PLAN
           Project  description
           Project  organization
           Facilities/equipment
           Data  quality objectives
           Sample collection
           Sample custody
           Calibration
           Sample analysis
           Documentation
           Data  management
           Internal QC checks
           External QA audits
           Preventative maintenance
           Routine  procedures
           Corrective action
           QA reports
                  PEER
                 REVIEW
                RPM/EPM
                APPROVAL
                INPUT TO
            STEP 4 - CONDUCT
               MONITORING
Figure 15.   Document Air Monitoring Plan.
                  3-80

-------
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
I
          •    U.S.  EPA,  1983.   Interim Guidelines and Specifications  for

               Preparing  of Quality Assurance  Pro.iect Plans.  QAMS-005/80

               (EPA-600/4-83-004; NTIS PB83-170514)


Additional guidance  Is available In the following:


          •    U.S.  EPA.  1984.  Guide to the  Preparation of Quality Assurance

               Pro.iect Plans.  Office of Toxic Substances, Office of

               Pesticides and Toxic Substances.  Washington, DC  20460.


          •    U.S.  EPA.  1977.  Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution

               Measurement Systems. Volumes I  and II.  EPA-600/9-76-005.

               Office of  Research and Development.  Research Triangle  Park, NC

               27711.

          •    ASTM.  1988.  Annual Book of Standards:  Part 26. Gaseous

               Fuels; Coal and Coke; Atmospheric Analysis.  American Society

               for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA  19103.


          •    U.S.  EPA.  1987.  Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for Prevention

               of Significant Deterioration (PSD).  EPA-450/4-87-007.

               Research Triangle Park,  NC 27711.


          •    U.S.  EPA.  1987.  Onsite Meteorological Program Guidance for

               Regulatory Modeling Applications.  EPA-450/4-87-013.  Research

               Triangle Park,  NC  27711.


Recommended EPA documents that provide detailed information on the calibration

process necessary for air monitoring QAPPs are:


          •    U.S. EPA,  1987.   Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution

               Measurement Systems.  Volumes I  and II.   EPA-60019-76-005.

               Office of Research and  Development.   Research Triangle Park, NC
               27711.
                                     3-81

-------
          •    U.S. EPA, 1987.  Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for Prevention
               of Significant Deterioration (PSD).  EPA-450/4-87-007.  Office
               of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle Park,
               NC  27711.

          0    U.S. EPA, 1987.  Onsite Meteorological Program Guidance for
               Regulatory Modeling Applications.  EPA-450/4-87-013.  Office of
               Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC
               27711.

Content of Quality Assurance Pro.iect Plan

          The following is a breakdown and description of the contents of a
typical QAPP.

          Pro.iect Description.  A general description of the project,
including the experimental  design, must be provided.  The description must be
complete enough to enable responsible parties to review and approve the
proposed plan.  The plan shall include the following items:

          •    Statement of objectives;
          •    Description of the air toxics monitoring program;
          •    Outline of the sampling method and frequency of sampling;
          •    Outline of the method of data analysis to be used;
          •    Anticipated duration of the project;  and
          t    Intended use of the acquired data.

          Pro.iect Organization and Responsibility.  A list of all personnel
assigned to data collection,  measurement, and verification, including brief
functional descriptions of their responsibilities, must be prepared.  An
organization chart and description of the qualifications of all  project
personnel  is also recommended.
                                     3-82

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          Facilities. Services. Equipment, and Supplies.  The utilization of

the resources required for the project must be considered.  Questions such as

the following should be addressed:


          •    Can the plan be completed meeting all monitoring requirements

               in a safe manner?


          •    Are the equipment and supplies needed to complete the project

               adequate and available in sufficient quantities?


          •    Who maintains and calibrates the equipment required to make the

               measurements?


          •    How frequently is the equipment calibrated and serviced?


          •    What standards are used to calibrate the equipment?

                       X

          •    Are special facilities needed to service or dispose of

               supplies?


          DQOs for Measurement Data.  It is important to define the acceptance

limits for data generated for the project to ensure that it is complete and

representative of the site.  An attempt should be made to discuss the

acceptance limits and control  factors for sampling and analysis errors.   This

includes means for determining if the data generated meet the requirements of

the monitoring objectives.


          Sample Collection.   EPA protocols for sample collection procedures

should be referenced and the procedures and equipment to be used in the

project should be described.   In addition,  a description of equipment and

supplies used to collect and transport samples and of preservatives used and

holding-time limitations should be provided.   Record-keeping procedures  must

be included to document pertinent detail.
                                     3-83

-------
          Sample Custody.  Procedures for field sampling operations as well as
laboratory operations are to be provided.  It is critical to ensure that
records are adequate to support legal documentation of the collection,
preservation, transport, and transfer of samples for laboratory analysis.

          Calibration Procedures.  The calibration procedure for each
measurement parameter should be described, either through reference to the
standard method used or through an ad hoc written description.  The frequency
of calibration and the frequency with which continuing calibration is verified
also should be described.  The standards for the calibration and the
acceptable sources should be documented.  Calibration should address, when
applicable, instrument flow rate, electronic zero and span for analytical
instruments and meteorological equipment, calibration gas requirements, and
external zero and span for analytical instruments.

          Laboratory Analysis Procedures.  EPA-approved procedures for the
monitoring parameters should be discussed.  Similarly, a written description
of the analytical procedures and SOPs that will be used in the monitoring
program should be addressed.

          Data Management.  Data management includes the procedures
established to store and maintain both field and laboratory data collection
and analysis records.

          Recordkeeoina/Documentation.  The QAPP should specify requirements
for field and laboratory documents.  For example, the use of logbooks, forms,
and other records of monitoring/analytical operations should be identified.

          Internal QC Checks.  The internal QC methods for the air quality
monitoring project should be described.  Items to be addressed include:

          t    Replicates;
          •    Spiked samples;
          •    Split samples;
          t    Control charts;

                                     3-84

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
          •    Blanks;

          t    Internal  standards;

          •    Zero and  span gases;

          •    Quality control samples;

          •    Surrogate samples;

          t    Calibration standards and devices; and

          t    Reagent checks.


          External QA Audits.  Audits should be scheduled to verify that

components of the monitoring program are in place and operating as described

for both field and laboratory QC procedures.


          Preventive Maintenance.  Preventive maintenance, including frequency

and methods of implementation, should be addressed in the QA plan.  A list of

the spare parts needed to ensure prompt equipment repair and thus to minimize

downtime should also be  prepared.


          Procedures to  Assess Data Quality.  Specific procedures to assess

the precision and accuracy of measurement data should be discussed in the

QAPP.  This includes standard statistical methods of evaluating data quality.

On completion of testing, the data can be reviewed by an independent reviewer

to assess the quality of the reported values.


          Feedback and Corrective Action.  The criteria for acceptable data

should be described, as  should the corrective action to be taken if the data

quality is not acceptable.   The personnel responsible for reviewing the data

and for implementing correction action should also be identified.


          Quality Assurance Reports to Management.  QAPPs should provide a

mechanism for the regular review of data quality.   These periodic reports

include data quality measurements,  performance and system audits,  and a

listing of measures taken to resolve problems noted.   Each of these elements

should be included in the final  project report.
                                     3-85

-------
Review and Approval of Quality Assurance Pro.iect Plan

          A draft of the QAPP should be reviewed by the EPA Project Officer
and the QA Officer to ensure that the plan contains the procedures necessary
to document the prevision, accuracy, and completeness of the data generated.

          The draft should also be subjected to a peer review--preferably
review by another air expert who was not a primary author of the plan.  At the
discretion of the RPM/EPM, this review could be conducted within the same
organization that developed the plan.

          Authority for final approval of the plan rests with the RPM/EPM, and
project cost and schedule are major considerations.

3.5       STEP 4 - CONDUCT MONITORING

3.5.1     Overview

          Field and analytical operations of the air monitoring program should
be conducted commensurate with the monitoring plan developed during Step 3.
However, successful implementation of the monitoring plan requires adequate
field staff and attention to QA/QC factors.  Therefore, the operational
approach illustrated in Figure 16 should be applied to Superfund air
monitoring programs.

3.5.2     Field Staff Qualifications and Training

          The air monitoring program should be designed arid directed by staff
with air toxics monitoring experience.  For many applications the site health
and safety officer will be qualified to direct the field monitoring
operations.  However, it should be recognized that site health and safety
officers, as well as staff with similar backgrounds (e.g., industrial
hygienists), may not have experience in air toxics monitoring at the low
detection levels (parts per billion or micrograms per cubic meter) specified
in ARARs to protect offsite receptors.  It is recommended, therefore, that

                                     3-86

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                MONITORING
                                   PLAN
                                 (STEP 3)
                                MONITORING
                                   STAFF
                              QUALIFICATIONS/
                                 TRAINING
  METHOD-SPECIFIC
  QA/QC CRITERIA
   (APPENDIX A)
  SUPERFUND QA/
FIELD OPERATIONS
 METHODS MANUAL
SAMPLING/ANALYSIS
 INSTRUMENTATION
   CALIBRATION
   (Table 35)
      QA/QC
  IMPLEMENTATION
    (Figure 17)

• QA Management
• Sampling QA
• Analytical QA
• Data Reduction QA
                                TECHNICAL
                               ASSISTANCE
                                DOCUMENT
                              (Appendix B)
    OTHER
  TECHNICAL
 REFERENCES
QC SAMPLING/
  ANALYSIS
 FREQUENCIES
  (Table 36)
                                INPUT TO
                           STEP 5 - SUMMARIZE
                              AND EVALUATE
                                RESULTS
                Figure 16.   Step 4 - Conduct Monitoring.
                                               3-87

-------
Superfund air monitoring projects be designed and implemented by air quality
specialists with relevant ambient air toxics monitoring experience.

          It is imperative that the field staff who will  be involved with the
operation of the network be trained personnel with sufficient understanding
of, and hands-on experience with, air toxics monitoring instrumentation and
laboratory analysis.  The field operators must be sensitive to the overall
aspects of the program including the need for:

          •    In-depth understanding of the operating principles for the
               equipment involved.

          •    Consistent performance of the preventive maintenance actions
               recommended by the manufacturer.

          •    Consistent performance of the routine tests of the equipment
               used to ensure it operates properly.

          •    Timely implementation of equipment checks and calibrations.

          t    Maintenance of network logbook and monitoring station logbooks
               to document pertinent field activities.  These activities must
               be documented in a clear manner to enable the use of the logs
               as needed in the future.

          •    Careful handling of samples collected to avoid the
               contamination or loss of materials collected, and the
               documentation in detail of every sample sent for laboratory
               analysis to maintain the correct chain-of-custody.

          •    Maintenance of the program sampling and analysis schedule.

          •    Checks of regenerated equipment (traps, plugs, canisters, etc.)
               that are returned by the laboratory.
                                     3-i

-------
I
I
•                  •     Consistent  collection  of  QA/QC  samples,  including collocated
™                       blanks.
•
—
I
g
I
|
                    •     Communication with  the  site  RPM/EPM to ensure that  he  is  kept
                         apprised  of  any  problem area and the means of mitigating  it.
                    •     Communication with  the  air toxics  specialist  assigned to the
8                       project  to  expedite the exchange of  information that is
                         essential to smooth network operation.

*
                   An  integral  part  of  the network operation  is the close communication
          with  the designated  contact at the  off site  laboratory to ensure that:

                   t    The samples  shipped  are  received on time.

                   t    Analysis  is  performed on time.
                   •    Any technical  issues that develop are handled promptly to
•                      minimize  loss  of data.
                         Laboratory  results are received in time for an evaluation of
                         the performance of the monitoring program and a preliminary
                         assessment  of, the implications of the results to the Superfund
                         project.
I                  It  is clear from this discussion that well -trained field personnel
         are the key to a good air toxics monitoring program.

•
         3.5.3          Quality Assurance/Quality Control
                   Quality assurance/quality control topics to be addressed in the
         QAPP, required for Superfund monitoring activities, have been identified in
•       Section 3.4.5.  During the conduct of the air monitoring program, rigorous
         conformance to the QAPP will be vital to meet project objectives.  Major QA/QC
•       elements that should be implemented during the operational phase of an air

                                              3-89

-------
monitoring program (see Table 34) include procedures to assess and control the
quality of the sampling, analytical, data reduction, and management
procedures.

          QA management involves implementing project-specific administrative
procedures to control QA/QC functions.  The potential for, and types of,
quality problems vary for the sampling, analytical, and data reduction
functions.  Therefore, the QA/QC requirements must be developed individually
for each of these functions.  Comprehensive QA/QC recommendations applicable
to Superfund and air monitoring programs are available.  Key references
include the following:

Superfund program-specific QA/QC recommendations

          •    U.S. EPA March 1986.   Quality Assurance/Field Operations
               Methods Manual.  Draft.

Generic air toxics monitoring QA/QC  recommendations

          t    U.S. EPA.  June 1983.  Technical  Assistance Document for
               Sampling and Analysis of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient
               Air.  EPA-600/4-83-027.  NTIS PB 83-239020.  Office of Research
               and Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.

Monitoring method-specific QA/QC recommendations

          •    U.S. EPA.  April 1984.  Compendium of Methods for the
               Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air.
               EPA-600/4-84-041.  Office of Research and Development.
               Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

          •    U.S. EPA.  September  1986.  Compendium of Methods for the
               Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air.
               EPA/600/4-87-006.  NTIS PB87-168696.  Office of Research and
               Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.

                                     3-90

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 TABLE 39.  QUALITY ASSURANCE (QA) ACTIVITIES TO BE SPECIFIED IN PROGRAM PLAN


QA Management
          QA System Design
          Design Control
          Data Evaluation
          Audit Procedures
          Corrective Action
          QA Reports to Program Management
          Training

Sampling QA
          Instrument Calibration and Maintenance
          Collection of Routine Quality Control Samples
          Data Recording
          Sample Labeling, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
          Chain-of-Custody Procedures

Analytical QA
          Method Validation Requirements
          Instrument Calibration and Maintenance
          Quality Control Sample Analysis
          Data Recording

Data Reduction QA
          Merging Sampling and Analysis Data Files
          Storage of Raw and Intermediate Data
          Data Validation.
                                               3-91

-------
          t    U.S. EPA.  June 1987.  Compendium Method TO-12:  Method for the
               Determination of Non-Methane Organic Compounds fNMOCl in
               Ambient Air Using Cryogenic Preconcentration and Direct Flame
               Inonzation Detection (PDFIDK  Research Triangle Park, NC
               27711.

          §    U.S. EPA.  May 1988.  Compendium Method TO-14:  The
               Determination of Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) in Ambient
               Air Using SUMMA® Passivated Canister Sampling and Gas
               Chromatoqraphic Analysis.  Quality Assurance Division.
               Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

          •    NIOSH.  February 1984.   NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods.
               NTIS PB 85-179018.   National Institute of Occupational Safety
               and Health.  Cincinnati, OH.

Meteorological monitoring QA/QC recommendations

          •    U.S. EPA.  June 1987.  On-Site Meteorological  Program Guidance
               for Regulatory Modeling Applications.   EPA-450/4-87-013.
               Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.   Research
               Triangle Park, NC  27711.

Air quality monitoring QA/QC recommendations

          •    U.S. EPA.  February 1983.  Quality Assurance Handbook for Air
               Pollution Measurements  Systems:  Volume IV.,  Meteorological
               Measurements.  EPA-600/4-82-060.  Office of Research and
               Development.   Research  Triangle Park,  NC  27711.

          •    U.S. EPA.  May 1987.  Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for
               Prevention of Significant Deterioration fPSDK
               EPA-450/4-87/007.  NTIS PB81-153231.  Office of Air Quality
               Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle Park,  NC  27711.
                                     3-92

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
These references should be consulted to specify project-specific QA/QC

requirements based on the approach illustrated in Figure 17.


          The technical QA recommendations presented in On-Site Meteorological

Program Guidance for Regulatory Modeling Applications (U.S. EPA, June 1987)

and Technical Assistance Document (TAD) for Sampling and Analysis of Toxic

Organic Compounds in Ambient Air (U.S. EPA, June 1983) should also be

implemented.  The calibration requirements and QC sampling/analysis frequency

criteria presented in Tables 35 and 36, respectively, are examples of the QA

recommendations presented in the TAD.


          The QA criteria presented in monitoring method-specific documents

(e.g., Technical Assistance Document for Sampling and Analysis of Toxic

Organic Compounds in Ambient Air. U.S. EPA, June 1983) should also be

implemented if these QA recommendations are more stringent than those

stipulated in the TAD.


          Supplemented technical QA recommendations based on other available

references (e.g., Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement

Systems. U.S. EPA, February 1983) should also be implemented as warranted for

factors not addressed in the previous documents.


3.6       STEP 5 - SUMMARIZE AND EVALUATE RESULTS


3.6.1     Overview


          Monitoring data available from Step 4 should be summarized and

evaluated to provide input to site-specific risk assessments and the Superfund

decision-making process.  The recommended data processing approach is

illustrated in Figure 18.   This approach consists of the following major
elements:


          •    Validate data;

          •    Summarize data;  and

          •    Model  dispersion to extrapolate monitoring data.


                                     3-93

-------
                          IMPLEMENT
                       SUPERFUND FIELD
                     OPERATIONS METHODS
                         MANUAL - QA
                         MANAGEMENT
                          APPROACH
IMPLEMENT TECHNICAL
ASSISTANCE DOCUMENT
 (TAD) - TECHNICAL
 QA RECOMMENDATIONS
    FOR AIR TOXIC
     MONITORING
    (APPENDIX A)
 IMPLEMENT METHOD-
    SPECIFIC QA
 CRITERIA IF MORE
STRINGENT THAN TAD
   (APPENDIX B)
 IMPLEMENT ON-SITE
  METEOROLOGICAL
 PROGRAM GUIDANCE
  - TECHNICAL QA
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR
  METEOROLOGICAL
    MONITORING
                   IMPLEMENT SUPPLEMENTAL
                TECHNICAL QA RECOMMENDATIONS
                  BASED ON OTHER AVAILABLE
                   REFERENCES AS WARRANTED
                   IF NOT ADDRESSED ABOVE
                        SITE-SPECIFIC
                        AIR MONITORING
                        QA/QC PROGRAM
    Figure 17.  Superfund Air Monitoring QA/QC Strategy.
                            3-94

-------
                             TABLE  35.   CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS  FOR SAMPLING AND  ANALYSIS  INSTRUMENTATION
Parameter
Device Calibrated
Method of
Calibration
Approximate
Frequency
Garments
            Sampling  Instrumentation

            Sampling  pump and controller
CO
 i
tn
            Analytical  Instruments
            Continuous monitors (e.g.,  FID,
            PID,  FPD. etc.)
           Chromatographic istruments
           GC/MS
           6C/MS
Flow rate
            Sample  volume measurement device     Total  volume
            (usually a dry test meter)
Response
Column performance
and retention time
for each analyte.
Response for each
analyte

Response and
retention time for
each analyte
Mass spectral
resolution and
turning parameters.
Wet or dry test
meter or calibrated
rotameter

Wet test meter
Generation of test
atmosphere of known
concentrations.
Injection of
standard using the
same process as for
sample Injection.

Same as above
Same as for other
Chromatographic
instruments
a) Introduction or
perfluoro-compound
directly into MS.

b) Injection of
tuning standard
(e.g., bromofluoro-
benzene) into GC.
Weekly



Weekly
Dally or more
frequently if
required.
Dally or more
frequently if
required.
                                                                                                Same as above
Same as for
other Chromato-
graphic
instruments

Daily
                                                                     Must be determined at known
                                                                     atmospheric  pressure and
                                                                     temperature.  Flow rate should be
                                                                     similar to that used for
                                                                     sampling.
Test atmosphere  should be
referenced to a  primary standard
(e.g.,  NBS benzene  in air).
Flow/pressure conditions should
duplicate sampling  process.

Standard composition should be
checked against  primary standards
If available.
                    Same as above.
                                                                                                                     Same  as for other chromatorgaphlc
                                                                                                                     instruments.
Selection of tuning standards
will be dependent on type of
analysis being  performed.

-------
        TABLE  36.   TYPICAL  SAMPLING/ANALYSIS FREQUENCIES FOR QC SAMPLES
Type of Sample                              Typical  Frequency
Field Blanks                           Each sample set; at least  10% of total
                                       number of samples.
Laboratory Blanks                      Daily;  at least 10% of total  number of
                                       samples.   Each batch of samples.
Spiked Samples                         Each sample set; weekly.
Duplicate (parallel) Samples           10% of total  number of samples; each
                                       sample set.
Instrument Calibration Standards       Daily.
Reference Samples                      Weekly.
Series (backup) samples3               Each Sample set.
a  Duplicates of each sample that are  archived.
                                     3-96

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                     INPUT DATA
                    FROM STEP 4
                    VALIDATE DATA

             • Meteorological monitoring
             • Air monitoring
                   SUMMARIZE DATA

             • Data listings
             • Statistical summaries
 METEOROLOGICAL
    SUMMARIES
AIR MONITORING
   SUMMARIES
                     DISPERSION
                     MODELING TO
                     EXTRAPOLATE
                        DATA
              D T C1? A C Cl?C CMt
                   MAFTraP
Figure 18.   Step 5 - Summarize and Evaluate Results.
                                               3-97

-------
          Raw monitoring data should be checked for validity before they are
used as a part of the data base for site decision-making.  These validity
checks are an integral part of the QA/QC program for monitoring activities.

          The validated data set should be further processed to provide
meteorological and air concentration summaries.  Meteorological data are also
used to classify the upwind/downwind (relative to the Superfund air emission
source) exposure conditions associated with air monitoring results.  The
validated data should be processed to obtain sequential data listings as well
as statistical summaries.

          Dispersion modeling may be warranted for certain situations to
supplement air monitoring results.  For example, it may be useful to
extrapolate site boundary monitoring results to offsite receptor locations of
interest.

          Each of these topics is discussed in greater detail in the following
subsections.

3.6.2     Validate Data

          Data validation is an important QA/QC component of Superfund
monitoring programs.  For Superfund APA applications,  this usually involves a
combination of automated checks during computer processing of the raw data as
well  as manual review of the data by an air specialist.

Meteorological Data Validation

          Raw meteorological  data should be checked for validity using
equipment calibration, audit, and performance data. Comprehensive technical
recommendations for meteorological data validation presented in the following
reference should be adopted for Superfund APAs:
                                      3-98

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
          t    U.S. EPA, June 1987.  On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance
               for Regulatory Modeling Applications.  EPA-450/4-87-013.
               Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research
               Triangle Park, NC  27711.

Table 37 presents meteorological data screening criteria.  It is an example of
the technical data validation recommendations presented in the reference cited
above.

Air Monitoring Data Validation

          Air monitoring data should also be validated utilizing equipment
calibration, audit, and performance data in a manner similar to that
recommended for meteorological data.

          Analytical results should be subject to a thorough validation
process.  This process requires the use of a qualified chemist who is familiar
with the data validation requirements and process.  Validation of analytical
results for one sample could take from 15 minutes to more than an hour,
depending on the type of analysis, the number of air toxic constituents
involved, interference, contamination, and other factors.

          Raw air quality data received from portable GC analyzers or other
continuous instruments should also be checked for validity.  The performance
of the analyzer, calibration, and QA results should be considered.

          Air monitoring data validation efforts should include evaluating
collocated station results and audit results to determine data precision and
accuracy, as follows:
                                              3-99

-------
         TABLE 37.  SUGGESTED METEOROLOGICAL DATA SCREENING CRITERIA8
                    (U.S. EPA, JUNE 1987)
Meteorological Variable                   Screening Criteria8
Wind Speed              Flag data if the value:
                        t  Is less than zero or greater than 25 m/s;
                        •  Does not vary by more than 0.1 m/s  for 3
                           consecutive hours; and
                        t  Does not vary by more than 0.5 m/s  for 12
                           consecutive hours.
Wind Direction          •  Is less than zero or greater than 360 degrees;
                        •  Does not vary by more than one degree for more than
                           three consecutive hours; and
                        •  Does not vary by more than ten degrees for 18
                           consecutive hours.
Temperature             t  Is greater than the local  record high;
                        •  Is less than the local  record low;  (The above
                           limits could be applied on a monthly basis.)
                        •  Is greater than a 5s change from the previous hour;
                           and
                        t  Does not vary by more than 0.5°C for 12 consecutive
                           hours.
Temperature Difference  •  Is greater than O.TC/m during the  daytime;
                        •  Is less than -0.1'C/m during the nighttime;  and
                        •  Is greater than 5.0*C/m or less than -3.0'C/m.
Dew Point Temperature   •  Is greater than the ambient temperature for  the
                           given time period.
                        •  Is greater than a 5°C change for the previous hour
                        t  Does not vary by more than 0.5*C for 12 consecutive
                           hours
                        •  Equals the ambient temperature for  12 consecutive
                           hours.
                                                               (Continued)
                                    3-100

-------
Meteorological Variable                   Screening Criteria"
Precipitation           •  Is greater than 25 mm in one hour.
                        t  Is greater than 100 mm in 24-hours.
                        •  Is less than 50 mm in three months.
I

I
•                                    TABLE 37.   (Continued)

I

I
_                                (The above values can be adjusted base on local
•                                climate.)
          Pressure                •  Is greater  than 1,060 mb (sea level)
•                                •  Is less than 940 mb (sea level)
I                                  (The above values can be adjusted for elevations  other
                                  than sea level).
                                  •  Changes by  more than  6 mb in  three hours.
          a Some criteria may have  to  be changed  for a  given  location.
I
                                    3-101

-------
t    The percent difference between the air concentrations measured
     at coal located samplers is:

             d,  -    Yi " Xi     x 100               (Eq. 2)
              1     (Yi - X.)/2

where:
     d1  -  the percent difference between the concentration of air
          toxic constituents Yi measured by the collocated
          monitoring station and the concentration of air toxic
          constituent Xi, measured by the monitoring station
          reporting the air quality.

t    The average percent difference dj  for the  monitoring period is:
                          n
                          2   d.                              (Eq. 3)
                         1-1
     where:
     d, =  percent difference defined above,  and
     n  = number of samples collected during the monitoring period.

     The standard deviation Sj  for the percent  differences  is:

                                             1/2             (Eq.  4)
1
n-1
^w
[
n ,
2 d.^
i=l
1
n
n
(2
i=l
d,)2]"
     The 95-percent probability limits  for precision are:
     Upper 95-Percent Probability Limit  - d.,+1.96 SyVZ  ~  (Eq. 4)
     Lower 95-Percent Probability Limit  - dj-1.96 S.//2  "  (Eq. 5)
                          3-102

-------
I
I
I
                    •    The accuracy is calculated for the monitoring period by
                         calculating the percent difference d1  between the  indicated
                         parameter from the audit (concentration,  flow rate, etc.) and
I                       the known parameter,  as follows:

                                 Id.  -  Yi ' Xi   x 100                         (Eq.  6)
                                           Xi
                         where:
                         Y,  «  monitor's indicated parameter from the ith audit check,
I                              and
                         Xi  =  known parameter used for the ith audit check.

g                  These results should then be compared with the QA/QC criteria
          stipulated in the  monitoring plan to determine data validity.

          3.6.3     Summarize  Data

                    Monitoring data summaries should be prepared using the validated
          data bases as input.  These meteorological  and air monitoring  data summaries
          facilitate the characterization of exposure potential  at various locations and
          receptors  of interest.

          Meteorological  Data  Summaries

                    Meteorological  data summaries  should include at least  the following:

                    t    Listing  of all  meteorological  parameters  for the  air sampling
                         periods;

                    •    Daytime  wind rose  (only for  coastal  or  complex  terrain  areas);

                    t    Nighttime  wind  rose  (only  for  coastal or  complex  terrain
                         areas);

                    t    Summary  wind rose;

                                              3-103

-------
          •    Summary of dispersion conditions for the sampling period (joint
               frequency distributions of wind direction versus wind speed
               category and stability class frequencies based on guidance
               presented in Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised) (U.S.
               EPA, July 1986);

          f    Tabular summaries of means and extremes for temperature and
               other meteorological parameters; and

          •    Data recovery summaries for all parameters.

          Meteorological listings should generally be presented on a
sequential hourly basis.  A 1-hour time frame is sufficient to account for any
short-term temporal variability of the data.  The presentation of data for
periods of less than 1 hour would unduly complicate the data evaluation
process, and the listings would be voluminous.  For those cases in which
multiple meteorological stations are used at a single site, it is desirable to
list the data in adjacent columns to facilitate data comparisons.

          Statistical summaries for the meteorological data should be
presented monthly, seasonally, and annually, and for the entire monitoring
period.  For sites with diurnal wind patterns (e.g., at complex terrain or
coastal areas), separate wind roses should be prepared to characterize daytime
conditions and nighttime conditions, and a summary wind rose (based on all
wind observations during the monitoring period) should be developed.  A
suggested format for wind rose data is illustrated in Figure 19.

          Data recovery information should also be presented to allow for an
evaluation of data representativeness.  The minimum data recovery target
should be 75 percent.
                                     3-104

-------
I
I
                                                                          April
                                                                         720 083
                    Wind Direction Frequency (Percent)
          //////    Mean Wind Speed (Mi/Hr)
                              Figure 19.  Example Wind Rose Format.
                                              3-105

-------
Air Monitoring Data Summaries

          Air monitoring data summaries should include at: least the following:

          •    A listing of concentrations measured by station and monitoring
               period indicating concentrations of all constituents for which
               monitoring was conducted.   The listings should indicate
               detection limits for those cases in which a constituent is not
               detected, as well as upwind/downwind exposiure classification
               and monitoring station operational data (e.g., sampling flow
               rates, station numbers,  sampling start/end times);

          •    Summary tables of constituent-specific concentrations measured
               for each monitoring station, including the following:
                    Mean concentration
                    Minimum concentration
                    Maximum concentration
                    Detection limit
                    Frequency above and below detection limits
                    Number of samples
                    Number of occurrences of air concentrations exceeding
                    selected values (e.g., health and safety criteria, ARARs
                    and odor thresholds)
                    Upwind/downwind exposure summaries;

          •    A narrative discussion of sampling results,  indicating problems
               encountered, the relationship of the sampling activity to unit
               operating conditions and meteorological conditions, sampling
               periods and times, background levels and other air emission
               sources, and interferences that may complicate data
               interpretation

          •    Data recovery parameters for all parameters
                                     3-106

-------
I
I
                    Air monitoring listings should be sequential and consistent with the
          sampling interval used (e.g.,  one 24-hour integrated sample to represent a 1-
          day period is frequently used).   The listings  should include flags to identify
          samples that exceed health/safety criteria, ARARs,  and odor thresholds.
          Monitoring station operational data (e.g.,  start and stop times for sampling,
          sampling flow rates) should also be included with the data listings.   If
          practical, concurrent data for the monitoring  network (i.e., all stations)
          should be listed in adjacent columns to facilitate  data comparisons.

                    The air monitoring data listings should also indicate the
          upwind/downwind classification of the monitoring station during the sampling
          period.  Based on hourly meteorological data,  the percentages of the sampling
          time that a station is upwind and downwind should be specified.  Therefore,
          upwind and downwind sectors (i.e., a range of  wind directions) should be
          defined for each monitoring station to aid in  data interpretation.  Figure 20
          illustrates the range of wind directions over  which the air monitoring
          stations will be downwind of an air emission source.  Therefore,
          concentrations measured during upwind conditions can be used to characterize
          background conditions, and concentrations measured during downwind conditions
          can be used to evaluate the source-specific contributions to downwind
          exposures.

                    Plotting individual concentration points  as a .function of downwind
          frequency can improve the interpretation of data for certain situations.  Such
          analyses are generally beneficial for sites with significant diurnal wind
          direction variability, especially those on complex terrain and in coastal
          locations.  An application of this downwind frequency analysis approach is
          illustrated in Figure 21.  Examination of the  data presented in this figure
          indicates that air concentrations at Station A are  random and not correlated
          with downwind frequency.  However, the data for Station B appear to be
          linearly related to downwind frequency.  Therefore, it can be concluded that
          the air emission source significantly affects  Station B but not Station A.
                                               3-107

-------
 '.VA
 :•'£•:
     MONITORING STATIONS
     DOWNWIND SfCTOR
                                             UNIT SOURCE
Figure 20.  Example of Downwind Exposures  at Air Monitoring Stations.
                             3-108

-------
I
I
              24-HOUR
        CONCENTRATION (ppb)

            100-r-
             50 --
KEY:
    STATION A

    STATION B
                                           60
                                  DOWNWIND FREQUENCY
         100
               Figure 21.  Example Application of Downwind Frequency Analysis,
                                           3-109

-------
          Statistical summaries of air monitoring data should be presented
monthly, seasonally, and annually, and for the entire monitoring period.  In
addition to concentration means and extremes,  these summaries should present
any other information deemed useful for the interpretation of monitoring
results.  Of particular interest, for example, is the frequency that sampling
results are below (or above) analytical detection limits.   Samples that are
below detection limits can greatly complicate  the computation of mean
concentrations.   Therefore,  in the computation of mean concentrations for a
Superfund APA application, concentrations for  any sampling period that are
less than the lower analytical detection limits should arbitrarily be assumed
to be one-half the lower detection limit.  Similarly, concentrations that
exceed the upper detection limits should arbitrarily be assumed to be equal to
the detection limit.

          Air monitoring data summaries should also indicate the number of
occurrences of air concentrations that exceed health/safety criteria, ARARs,
and odor thresholds.  Upwind/downwind exposure conditions! should also be
addressed in these summaries.  Therefore, concentration means and extremes for
each station should be presented for the following data sets:

          •    All samples;

          •    Samples that are predominantly (i.e., greater than 75 percent)
               downwind; and

          •    Samples which are predominantly (i.e., greater than 75 percent)
               upwind.

          Data recovery information should also be presented to evaluate data
representativeness.  A minimum data recovery target should be 75 percent.
                                     3-110

-------
3.6.4     Perform Dispersion Modeling

          Results of atmospheric dispersion modeling can be used to assist in
the interpretation of the air monitoring results.   They also can be used to
augment the measured data.

          Dispersion patterns derived by plotting isopleths of air
concentration divided by the source emission rate for the air monitoring
periods can provide information on areas of high concentrations and zones of
concentration gradients.   Comparison of these patterns with measured
concentrations can provide additional information on areas of high
concentration and a qualitative interpolation and extrapolation of the pattern
of the measured concentrations.

          Frequently it may not be practical to place air monitoring stations
at offsite receptor locations of interest.  However,  it may be necessary to
characterize concentrations at these locations as input to site-specific risk
assessments.  In these cases, dispersion patterns based on modeling results
can be used to extrapolate concentrations monitored onsite to offsite
locations.  An example of this application is illustrated in Figure 22.

          Technical recommendations regarding the conduct of dispersion
modeling studies (e.g., model selection) are provided in Section 2.
                                     3-111

-------
ATMOSPHERIC DILUTION PATTERN
 • = NEAREST RECEPTORS
 + = MONITORING STATIONS
	= DILUTION FACTOR ISOPLETHS
    (RATIO OF DOWNWIND
CONC^TWN/FACIUTV PROPERTY 1OUNDARY CONCENTRATION,
    Figure 22.  Example Atmospheric Dispersion (Dilution) Pattern.
                      3-112

-------
                                   SECTION 4
                                 CASE EXAMPLES
4.1       OVERVIEW
          Several case examples are presented in this section to demonstrate
the atmospheric dispersion modeling and air monitoring procedures given in
Sections 2 and 3.  Example 1 illustrates a combined modeling and monitoring
study in support of an RI/FS at a hypothetical wood treatment facility.  The
site is first described, then the five-step procedure for designing and
conducting a dispersion modeling study is shown, followed by the five-step
procedure for designing and conducting an air monitoring study.

          Air monitoring programs are generally more dificult to design than
dispersion modeling studies, so three additional case examples are shown for
Superfund sites that present elements of complexity in the monitoring
situations representative of actual conditions at many sites.  The discussion
for examples 2, 3, and 4 focuses on the design of an air monitoring network of
refined monitoring techniques; it is assumed that real-time monitoring is also
conducted at each site as part of the health and safety plan.

          Example 2 is somewhat more complicated than the ideal monitoring
scenario with a wider wind arc, fugitive sources distributed over a wider area
and two other nearby emission sources, both downwind.  Example 3 is
characterized by an even wider wind arc,  two other nearby emission sources
both upwind of the Superfund site,  two nearby receptors and restricted access
to some potential sampling sites.   Example 4 has both complex meteorology and
complex terrain because of weak seasonal  air patterns and the location of the
site in a river valley in a heavily industrialized region.
                                     4-1

-------
4.2       EXAMPLE 1 - DISPERSION MODELING/AIR MONITORING APPLICATION

          A screening assessment (based on emission/dispersion modeling)
commensurate with Volume I recommendations was conducted to characterize
hazardous air contaminants being released from an inactive wood treatment
facility that had been placed on the NPL.  Evaluation of these screening
results indicated that it was necessary to conduct a combined dispersion
modeling/air monitoring program to more accurately quantify air emissions from
the site to support preparation of an RI/FS.  The site is described in Section
4.2.1.  The air dispersion modeling study is presented in Section 4.2.2 and
the air monitoring study is presented in Section 4.2.3.

4.2.1     Site Description

          The site is an inactive 12-acre wood treatment facility located in a
flat inland area of the southeast.  At one time, creosote and
pentachlorophenol were used as wood preservatives; heavy metal salts were also
used.  The creosote and pentachlorophenol were disposed of in a surface
impoundment.  Past waste disposal practices included treatment and disposal of
the metal salts in a surface impoundment and disposal of contaminated wood
shavings in waste piles.  The constituents of concern in the facility's waste
stream include phenols, cresols, and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs)
in the creosote; dibenzodioxins and dibenzofurans as contaminants in
pentachlorophenol; and particulate heavy metals.  The potential emission
sources (Figure 23) include the container storage facility for creosote and
pentachlorophenol, the wood treatment and product storage areas, the surface
impoundment for the creosote and pentachlorophenol wastes, and the
contaminated soil area, which previously contained both the surface
impoundment for treating the metal salts and the wood shavings storage area.
Seepage from these waste management units has resulted in documented ground-
water and surface water contamination.
                                      4-2

-------
              INACTIVE SURFACE
              IMPOUNDMENT ANO
              CONTAMINATED
              WOOD SHAVINGS
              STORAGE AREA
             SURFACE
             IMPOUNDMENT
                OFFICE
TREATMENT
ANO PRODUCT
STORAGE AREAS
                                      I
                    CONTAINER
                    STORAGE
                    FACILITY
                         GATE
                     PREVAILING
                     WIND
                     DIRECTION
Figure 23.  Example 1 Site  Plan for Air Dispersion Modeling,
                          4-3

-------
          The area surrounding the facility has experienced substantial
development over the years.  A shopping center is now adjacent to the eastern
site perimeter.  This development has significantly increased the number of
potential receptors of air releases of hazardous constituents.

          The first step in developing the modeling/monitoring program was to
examine the composition of wastes handled in each waste management unit were
determined to identify which contaminants were likely to be present in the air
releases.  Existing water quality data indicated contamination of groundwater
with cresols, phenol, and PAHs, and of surface water with phenols, benzene,
chlorobenzene, and ethyl benzene.  A field sampling program was developed to
further characterize the facility's waste stream.  Wastewater samples were
collected from the aerated surface impoundment, and soil samples were
collected from the heavy metal salt waste treatment/disposal area.  Analytical
data from this sampling effort confirmed the presence of the contaminants
previously identified.  Additional contaminants detected included toluene and
xylenes in surface impoundment wastes, and arsenic, copper, chromium, and zinc
in the treatment/disposal area.

4.2.2     Example 1 - Dispersion Modeling Study

          The dispersion modeling study is presented below.  The discussion
follows the format given in Section 2 for conducting a modeling study.

Collect and Review Information

          The results of the information review are summarized in the site
description in Section 4.2.1.

Select Modeling Sophistication Level

          A screening air dispersion modeling was performed as a part of the
planning stage for the project.  It addressed a few receptors at the site
perimeter.  The increase in development in the vicinity of the site and the
associated increase in the number of potential receptors that could be exposed

                                      4-4

-------
to air toxics releases from the site required the use of refined dispersion
modeling in support of the RI/FS activities.

          It was determined that the ISC dispersion model is the preferred
model for this applications because:

          •    The sources involved resemble the types of industrial sources
               for which the model was developed;

          •    The topography is gently rolling and no major topographical
               obstruction exist; and

          •    The ISC dispersion model was employed successfully for a
               Superfund site similar to the one under consideration.

Develop Modeling Plan

          Based on their individual emission potentials (as determined from
waste analyses and confirmatory emission rate modeling) and potential for
presenting health and environmental hazards, the following target compounds
were selected for use in the dispersion modeling (and air monitoring):

          t    Volatile/semivolatile constituents
                    Toluene
                    Benzene
                    Total  phenols
                    Pentachlorophenol
                    Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons
                    Cresols

          t    Particulate constituents
                    Arsenic
                    Copper
                    Chromium
                -   Zinc
                                     4-5

-------
          The target compound list was then evaluated in terms of prevalence
of contaminants In each of the four sources and the Information available
about the activities involved with each source (see Table 38).

          Emission predictive equations were identified using Volume II,
Estimation of Baseline Air Emissions at Superfund Sites, for the sources
involved.  This included:

          t    Predictive lagoon equations for the inactive surface
               impoundment and the aerated surface impoundment for organics,
               and predictive fugitive dust equations for inorganics; and

          •    Predictive closed landfill  equations for the treatment and
               product storage areas and the container storage facility, and
               predictive fugitive dust equations for inorganics.

          Onsite meteorological  monitoring from a 10-meter tower provided 3
months of data.  These data were used to evaluate the applicability of
meteorological data available from an NWS station located about 25 kilometers
southeast of the site.  The evaluation of wind data showed that:

          •    Offsite meteorological data correlate reasonably with the
               onsite data for the same time period.  Wind direction data for
               offsite areas show the same pattern as those for onsite areas,
               i.e. an apparent small shift of about 10 to 15 degrees.  The
               frequency distribution of wind speed and direction by stability
               is within about 20-30 percent.

          t    No major topographical features or water bodies exist between
               the NWS station and the site.

          It was decided to use 5 years of meteorological data from the NWS
station.  This included both surface and upper air data.
                                      4-6

-------
  TABLE 38.  TARGET CONSTITUENTS MODELED FOR EACH OF THE SOURCES AT THE SITE


                                                Source
Target Compounds
In-active
Surface
Impoundment
Aerated
Surface
Impoundment
Treatment
and Product
Storage Areas
Container
Storage
Facility
Organics - gases
Toluene                       XXX
Benzene             'X             X              X
Total Phenols                 XXX
Pentaochlorophenol            X             X              X             X
PAHs                          XXX
Cresols                       XX              XX
Inorganics-Particulate
Arsenic                       X                            XX
Copper                        X                            X
Chromium                      X                            X
Zinc                          X                            X
                                      4-7

-------
          Considering prevailing wind directions, source characteristics
(ground level releases), population distribution in the site vicinity, and
other sensitive receptor locations, it was decided to set up a grid with
closely spaced receptors adjacent to the site.  For modeling purposes,
concentrations were averaged every 24 hours and annually.

          Background concentrations for the target (indicator) compounds were
obtained from a 1-month perimeter monitoring program conducted at the site.
The background concentrations were obtained from upwind stations utilizing the
onsite data.

Conduct Modeling

          The emission inventory for the target compounds was developed based
on the methodology outlined in the modeling plan.  Data were input into the
ISC dispersion model.  Meteorological data from the NWS station were
preprocessed to generate hourly data used by the ISC dispersion model.
Receptor coordinates based on the receptor grid developed were input into the
model.

          All input data were checked and verified before the files were
linked to the model.  A test run was performed to verify that the model
performed as specified.

          Dispersion calculations were performed for each of the target
compounds, and computer printout were obtained.  Individual runs were made for
the various target compounds.

Summarize and Evaluate Results

          Results of the calculations were checked to ensure that no errors
were made with the input data.  Three hand calculations were made to determine
the arsenic concentration at a selected receptor to verify that the model
calculations are correct.  Ground-level concentrations were summarized for
                                      4-8

-------
each target compound by considering the highest and second highest 24-hour
concentrations and 24-hour concentrations at sensitive receptors.

          Isopleths of annual concentrations were plotted for the target
compounds in a format similar to the one shown in Figure 6.

Prepare a Report

          A report summarizing the results of the dispersion calculations and
the detailed methodology was prepared.  The calculations were based on
readings obtained at receptors arranged in a rectangular grid (see Figure 24)
with intervals of 100 meters for the area close to the site and on the site
perimeter; 200 meters for the area from the site perimeter to about 1
kilometer from the center of the site; 500-meters for the area between 1 and 2
kilometers from the center of the site; and 1 kilometer for the area between 2
and 5 kilometers from the center of the site.

          This receptor distribution was considered adequate to cover offsite
publicly accessible locations and sensitive environmental receptors.

          In the latter case, it was determined that most of the development
took place up to about 2 kilometers from the site and mainly to the east.

          The model selected was the ISC dispersion model.  It was considered
most suitable for this application.  Both the short- and long-term
calculations were performed.  Key model switches included:

          •    Calculate concentration (=1);

          •    Discrete receptor system - rectangular (=1);

          •    Terrain elevations are read - no (=0);

          •    Compute average concentrations for 24 hours - yes («1); for
               other averaging times - no (-0);

                                      4-9

-------
                                                  •    fl
                                                                 prevailing
                                                                    wind
                                                                  direction
                       •  •
site
area
                   Figure 24.   Receptor  Grid Close  the  Site.
                                      4-10

-------
          t    Print highest  second highest tables - yes  (-1); maximum 50
               tables  - yes (=1);

          t    Rural-urban option  - rural  (=1);

          •    Wind profile exponent values - default  (-1);

          •    Vertical potential  temperature gradient values - default  (=1);
               and

          •    Program calculates  final plume rise only - no (=2).

4.2.3      Example 1 - Air Monitoring Study

Collect and Review Information

          The results of the  information review are summarized in the site
description in Section 4.2.1.

Select Monitoring Sophistication Level

          A limited onsite air screening survey was first conducted to
document air releases of potentially hazardous contaminants, to assign
priorities to air emission sources, and to verify screening assessment
modeling results and the need to conduct a monitoring program.   Total
hydrocarbon (THC) levels were measured with a portable THC analyzer downwind
of the aerated surface impoundment, wood treatment area,  and product storage
area.  Measurements were also made upwind of all units to provide background
concentrations.  The THC levels detected downwind were significantly higher
than background levels.  However, compound-specific results were not available
from this screening approach to quantify the potential  health and safety
impacts associated with air emissions from the site.   Therefore,  a refined
monitoring program to characterize releases to the air was considered
appropriate.
                                     4-11

-------
Develop Monitoring Plan

          The target analytes for the air monitoring were selected on the same
basis as the target compounds for the dispersion modeling.  The lists are
identical since no logistical considerations precluded collecting and
analyzing each of the compounds.  They were:

          •    Volatile/semi volatile constituents
                    Toluene
                    Benzene
                    Total phenols
                    Pentachlorophenol
                    Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons
                    Cresols

          t    Particulate constituents
                    Arsenic
                    Copper
                    Chromium
                    Zinc

          Meteorological information is critical for designing an air
monitoring program because stations must be located both upwind and downwind
of the contaminant sources.  Therefore, a 1-month meteorological monitoring
survey was conducted at this flat-terrain site.   The survey was conducted
under conditions considered representative of the summer months during which
air samples would be collected.  Summer represented the worst-case combination
of emission and dispersion conditions (i.e., light, steady winds and warm
temperatures).  The collected meteorological data showed that the local wind
direction was from the southwest.  No well-defined secondary wind flows were
identified.  The survey data also confirmed that one 10-meter meteorological
station would be sufficient to support the air monitoring program.

          The onsite meteorological survey data were used with the EPA's,
Industrial Source Complex  (ISC) dispersion model to estimate the worst-case

                                     4-12

-------
 air emission concentrations and to help determine the locations of the air
 sampling stations.   The ISC dispersion model  was used because of its
 capability to simulate conditions of point and nonpoint source air emissions.
 Allowing for the established southwest wind direction,  maximum downwind
 concentrations were predicted for different meteorological  conditions (e.g.,
 different wind speeds).  The selection of upwind background stations and
 downwind monitoring stations was based on the predicted dispersion pathways.
 Because the releases from the individual  source areas overlapped,  the model
 also provided a means of estimating the contamination from  each source.

           Figure 25 shows the locations of the selected sampling stations.
 Station 1 was selected as the upwind background station.  Background volatile
 organic concentrations,  particulate concentrations,  and meteorological
 conditions were monitored at this station.  Stations  2  and  4  were  located  at
 points  convenient for the monitoring of volatile emissions  from the  surface
 impoundment and wood treatment/product  storage areas, respectively.   Station 3
 was  located downwind of the  inactive surface  impoundment/wood shavings
 disposal  area.   Releases  from these sources and  worst-case  concentrations  of
 volatiles  and particulates at the site  property  boundary were documented at
 this  site.   For this application,  the locations  of Stations 2,  3,  and 4 were
 adequate  for characterizing  the  air concentrations at both  the  source boundary
 and  the site property  boundary  (due to  the proximity of these two  boundaries
 in the downwind  direction  of the  units  of concern for the site  prevailing wind
 direction).   Three  trailer-mounted  air  monitoring stations were  used  to
 supplement  the  permanent  stations  and to account for any variability  in wind
 direction.

          Several alternative methods were considered for air monitoring at
 this site.   It was decided to use EPA Method TO-14 (whole air sampling using
metal canisters) for benzene  and toluene.  A modified high-volume sampler
consisting of a glass fiber filter with a polyurethane foam backup sorbent
 (EPA Method TO-4) was selected to sample for total phenols,  pentachlorophenol,
and PAHs.  NIOSH Method 2001, which involves use of silica gel cartridges,  was
selected for the collection and analysis of cresol samples.   Particulates were
collected on glass fiber filters using high-volume samplers.

                                     4-13

-------
        ©
              INACTIVE SURFACE
              IMPOUNDMENT ANO
              CONTAMINATED
              WOOD SHAVINGS
              STORAGE AREA
             SURFACE
             IMPOUNDMENT
               OFFICEQ
       TRCATM6NT     {
       ANO PWOOUCT
       STORAGS AAEA3
                                      I
CONTAINER
STORAGE
FACILITY
                                    PREVAILING
                                    WIND
                                    DIRECTION
                         GATE
Monitoring Location

     Figure  25.  Example Site Plan and Air Monitoring Network.
                             4-14

-------
Conduct Monitoring

          The air quality monitoring was conducted over a 3-month period
during the summer.  Meteorological variables were measured continuously
throughout the study.  Air samples were taken over a 24-hour period every six
days.  A rigorous QA/QC program was implemented commensurate with the selected
monitoring period and according to the method specified in EPA technical
reference documents.  Field technicians assigned to conduct multimedia
environmental surveys for the RI/FS and to operate the air monitoring network.
These staff were trained by an air toxics specialist.  The air toxics
specialist also routinely reviewed the monitoring results to evaluate data
validity, to identify potential monitoring problems, and to determine the need
for corrective action.  He was assisted by a chemist, who performed the
detailed data validation for the air toxics under consideration.

Summarize and Evaluate Results

          Standard sampling/analytical methods were available for all the
target monitoring compounds.  However, analytical detection limits were below
specific health and environmental criteria for all compounds except cresol.
The high analytical detection limit for cresol--it exceeded reference health
criteria—complicated data analysis.  This difficulty was handled by the
collection and analysis of additional waste samples.  The data obtained in
these analyses were subjected to emission rate modeling to determine the
emission potential of cresol and thus to develop an estimate of cresol levels
in the air.

          Analytical results obtained during this sampling program established
that fugitive air emissions significantly exceeded reference health criteria.
Measures to reduce emission concentrations to a point below health criteria
levels were identified.
                                     4-15

-------
4.3   '    EXAMPLE 2 - AIR MONITORING APPLICATION

          This example scenario presents a monitoring situation with minimum
levels of complication.  The presentation primarily deals with one step of the
five-step process given in Section 3 - the design of the air monitoring
network.  The key parameters for example 2 are listed in Table 39.  The site
is assumed to be in the remediation phase, with emissions arising from
excavation of contaminated soils and nearby on-site stabilization.  Two views
of the Superfund site are given in Figure 26.

          With strong seasonal winds and a small wind arc, only one 100%
upwind location (#1) is necessary.  Seven downwind locations (#2-#8) are in an
array between the Superfund site and the adjacent wastewater treatment
facility and the interstate freeway.  These downwind sites are located at
three radial distances from the site:  1000, 2000, and 3000 feet from the
center of the remediation area.  Note that the site fenceline in the downwind
direction is only 1200-1300 feet from the center of the processing area.
Thus, some of the downwind sites will have to be placed off the property.

          The downwind monitoring locations are symmetrically arranged around
the predominant wind direction axis, and are horizontally distributed (over an
angle of approximate WIND ARC + 50%) to sample both the center and the edges
of the emission plume from the site, i.e., to help define the horizontal
extent of the plume.

          Seven downwind monitoring locations were selected for this scenario
to achieve the following objectives:

          •    Provide measurements of air concentration of target compounds
               as a function of distance from the remediation area, i.e., at
               three distances:  approximately 1000, 2000, and 3000 feet;
                                     4-16

-------
           TABLE 39.  KEY PARAMETERS FOR EXAMPLE 2 - AIR MONITORING



1.  Project Objective:

          •    Measure Impact on ambient air of emissions due to remediation


2.  Meteorological Conditions:

               Strong seasonal winds from the west, 5-15 mph
               Small wind arc, 40-50*
               Moderate temperatures, 60-80°F
               Moderate relative humidity, 40-80% RH
               Good historical meteorological records

3.  Topography:

          •    Site located in low, sandy rolling hills
          •    Excavated flat terraces for emission sources
          t    Approximately 100 feet elevation difference between waste
               processing area and lowest downhill monitoring location

4.  Emission Sources Within Site:

          t    Major emissions from the site are fugitive sources localized in
               the processing area

          t    Elevated point sources exist in the processing area but are not
               major sources of target compounds


5.  Regional Ambient Air Quality:

          •    Regional ambient air quality is good


6.  Other Emission Sources:

          •    No industrial development or heavy vehicular traffic in the
               area immediately upwind of site

          •    Other nearby emission sources are all downwind of the site: a
               petroleum refinery, a wastewater treatment facility, an
               interstate freeway


                                                                   (Continued)
                                     4-17

-------
                            TABLE 39.  (Continued)
7.  Power, Access, and Security at Monitor Sites:
          a    115 VAC power available for meteorological station site only
          •    Site fenceline in the downwind direction is only 1200-1300 feet
               from center of the processing area
          0    Some monitoring sites will be located outside site property,
               but no problems with access or security are expected
8.  Receptor Locations:
          0    Downwind fenceline is close enough to processing area that some
               downwind monitoring sites must be located off the property
          0    No problems with access to potential sampling sites for almost
               360° around site
                                     4-18

-------
      Predominate
      Wind Direction
                                                Emission
                                                     Plume
                          Cross  Section  View
  North I
Cross section
viewed above
                         Road
              Figure 26.   Two Views of  Example  2  Site
                                  4-19

-------
          t    Provide measurement of air concentrations as a function of %
               Time Downwind, i.e., with normal  variation in the wind
               direction, sites 2, 4, 5, 7 might not be downwind of the site
               for 100% of the sampling time,  although sites 3,  6,  and 8
               should be;

          •    Address measurement of site emissions from points outside the
               remediation; and

          t    Measure the air concentrations  in the upwind air passing over
               the site and in the downwind air before it is impacted by the
               other emission sources farther  downwind.

4.4       EXAMPLE 3 - AIR MONITORING APPLICATION

          This example presents a monitoring situation complicated by another
emission source (a chemical plant) near to but upwind of the Superfund site,
nearby receptors (office complex and a road) and a wide expected wind arc
(approximately 180°).  As in example 2, the presentation of example 3 centers
on the design of an air monitoring network employing refined monitoring
techniques for a planned remedial design employing on-site processing
(stabilization) of excavated soils.  The key parameters for this site are
given in Table 40.  The site is shown in a plot plan in l-'igure 27.   This
monitoring scenario reflects the complexity that is encountered when Superfund
sites are located in developed industrial areas.

          A total of ten monitoring locations  are a minimum to achieve the
specific monitoring objectives for this scenario:  two upwind and eight
downwind (plus an optional eleventh location).  The rationale for the number
and location is given below.
                                     4-20

-------
           TABLE 40.  KEY PARAMETERS FOR EXAMPLE 3 - AIR MONITORING

1.  Project Objective:
          t    Measure impact on ambient air of emissions from remediation
2.  Meteorological Conditions:
          •    Wind speeds are moderate, generally from the south, and
               5-10 mph
          •    Wind direction variability over a 24-hour period is high during
               this season; wind arc of approximately 180°
          •    Moderate temperatures, 60-80'F
          •    Moderate relative humidity, 40-80% RH
          •    Good historical meteorological records
3.  Topography:
          t    Flat, no surface features
4.  Emission Sources Within Site:
          t    Major emissions are fugitive emissions localized in the
               processing area
          •    Elevated point sources exist in processing area but are not
               major sources of target compounds
5.  Regional Ambient Air Quality:
          •    Regional  ambient air is impacted by refineries and chemical
               plants in the region
6.  Other Emission Sources:
          •    A chemical  plant is nearby and upwind of the site part of the
               time (when winds are from southwest)
          t    Vehicular traffic on a road on the western perimeter of the
               site could be source of target compound emissions

                                                                   (Continued)
                                     4-21

-------
                            TABLE 40.  (Continued)
7.  Power, Access, and Security
          t    115 VAC power is available for meteorological station site only
          •    Good access for 360* around the processing area, but another
               source and receptors are within 1000-2000 feet of the
               remediation area
          •    Access to the adjacent farm land was denied
8.  Receptor Locations:
          •    Office complex northwest of remediation area and about 2000
               feet away
          •    Vehicular traffic on road west of remediation area and about
               2000 feet away
                                     4-22

-------
ro
CO
              tt>
              ro
-o
 n>
 CO
 CO
 _j-
 «-»•
 o>
 TJ
 ft)
                                                                                                                                            ftftf/fftttfttffff
                                                                                                                                            tfttftttfftttttttt
                                                                                                                                            tttttttftttttftttt
                                                                                                                                            ttttftffttftittttf

-------
          Monitoring locations 1 and 2 are upwind of the site and location 2
is between the Superfund site and the chemical plant.  Two upwind locations
are needed to help separate the impact of the other emission source.  Location
1 is on the line of the mean wind direction (as are locations 3, 5, and 8).
For winds from the southwest, samplers 2, 6, 9, and 10 would monitor for
emissions from the chemical plant flowing across the road and reaching the
office complex.  Therefore, these samplers serve to isolate the impact of the
chemical plant.

          Three downwind monitoring locations (3, 5, and 8) are on the mean
wind direction vector at distances of 500, 1000, and 2000 feet, respectively,
from the remediation area.  These three sites sample the dispersion along the
axis of the emission plume.

          Three sampling loations (6, 9,  and 10) are situated on one side of
the plume axis, but on wind direction vectors between the center of the
processing area and the nearby receptors  (the office complex and the road).
Locations 6 and 10 are at distances of 1000 and 2000 feet, respectively.
Location 9 is at the fence!ine adjacent to the office complex.   Two sampling
locations (4 and 7) are on the other side of the plume axis.  Two are adequate
since there are no receptors on that side.

          An eleventh optional sampling location might be placed just downwind
of the center of the remediation area.  This sampler would measure the maximum
impact of emissions from the site.  This  additional data point might be very
useful in separating the impact of the site cleanup from all the other nearby
sources.

4.5       EXAMPLE 4 - AIR MONITORING APPLICATION

          This monitoring scenario presents a situation of complex meteorology
and topography, with the Superfund site located in a river valley in a heavily
industrialized region.  The key parameters of the monitoring scenario are
given in Table 41 and the plan of the refinery area is shown in Figure 28.
                                     4-24

-------
           TABLE 41.  KEY  PARAMETERS FOR EXAMPLE 4 - AIR MONITORING

 1.  Project Objectives:
          •    Measure impact on ambient air of emissions from remediation
 2.  Meteorological Conditions:
          •    Seasonal air movement is weak (0-2 mph) and highly variable in
               direction leading to extended periods of stagnant air
          •    Only short-term  (1-2 days) weather forecasts are available and
               relevant
          •    Rain, cloudiness, high humidity are also seasonal; moderate
               temperatures 40-60*F
          •    Good historical  records
 3.  Topography:
          t    Site is located  in a narrow river valley in an area dominated
               by steep-sided hills and valleys
          •    Emissions from the site are restricted by the walls of the
               valley up to an  elevation of 1000-2000 feet above the valley
               floor
 4.  Emission Sources Within Site:
          •    Major emissions within the site are fugitive sources localized
               in the process area
          t    The processing area is long and narrow and parallel  to the
               river
          •    The site contamination includes cyclopentane.   There are no
               other cyclopentane emission sources in the valley so that it
               might be useful as a tracer compound unique to the site
5.  Regional  Ambient Air Quality:
          •    The region is characterized by heavy and diverse industrial
               development
          •    Regional  ambient  air quality is  poor especially under stagnant
               air conditions
                                                                   (Continued)
                                     4-25

-------
                            TABLE 41.  (Continued)
6.  Other Emission Sources:
          •    There are major emission sources in the region as well as in
               the river valley location of the site, e.g., a chemical plant
               is located directly across the river and a road to the east
7.  Power, Access, and Security at Monitor Sites:
          •    115 VAC power is available at meteorological station site
          t    Access to potential sampling sites  is very restricted by the
               hilly topography and the river
8.  Receptor Locations:
          t    A residential area is located near  the site
          •    For chemical emissions that could become trapped in the river
               valley under stagnant meteorological  conditions, workers of the
               Superfund site and chemical plant are potential receptors.
                                     4-26

-------
ex.
 O)
 o>
"o.
00
CM
 OJ
 3
 a»

-------
As in the two previous examples, the object is to assess off-site impacts from
remediation of the site.  Remediation is again assumed to involve on-site
processing of the contaminated soils/waste with no thermally buoyant
emissions.

          The sources in the processing area are at ground level but spread
out along the river.  There are no structural  obstructions within the area.
The topography is complex with a range of hills east and south of the site, a
river along the south edge of the site's boundary and rolling hills west and
north of the site.  Historical wind direction  data and forecasted data
indicate a wind direction arc of approximately 270* from the southeast and
wind speeds from less than two mph to seven mph over a 24-hour period.  Nearby
sources exist to the south (a chemical plant)  and to the east (roadway).
Three receptor locations are identified; the residential area to the north of
the remediation area, the chemical plant to the south, and the roadway to the
east.

          In this scenario it is obvious that  the complex topography will
interact significantly with the complex meteorology.  The movement of air in
the valley and the pattern of dispersion of the chemical emissions from the
Superfund site would be hard to predict.  Under this condition,  it will be
difficult to estimate the impact of the remediation emissions on the ambient
air in the valley.  Several alternative courses of action for this scenario
are discussed below.

          One option would be to modify the project goal to only measure
ambient air concentrations in the valley and not attempt to estimate the
site's contribution to these concentrations.  For example, monitoring sites
could be located around all of the potential receptors:   in the residential
area, on the road, on the Superfund site and around the  chemical plant.  Such
a strategy would serve to estimate the ambient air concentrations (and
inhalation exposure potential) at receptor locations without attempting to
evaluate the site's contribution.
                                     4-28

-------
          Another option would involve the use -of cyclopentane as a tracer
airborne chemical unique to the cleanup.  In this option, ambient air
concentrations of cyclopentane would be measured along with several other
target compounds characteristic of the Superfund site.  It would have to be
established that the tracer cyclopentane could act as a surrogate for the
other chemical emissions from the site.  If the correlation could be
established, then measurement of ambient air concentrations of cyclopentane
and other target compounds at the receptor sites could be used to deduce the
impact of the remediation.

          Another option involves collecting or developing three-dimensional
air patterns for the river valley as a function of different meteorological
conditions.  With this site-specific meteorological  and topographical input,
an air dispersion model could be calculated for the emissions from this site.
The modeling results could predict the areas of maximum air concentrations in
the valley to serve as guidance for the placement of sampling sites.  All this
should be done as input to the study design.

          Choices among the options outlined above will  involve review of
project objectives and the resources available, e.g.,  budget and schedule.
These choices can only be made on a case-by-case basis.   Thus, the complexity
of example 4 prevents a specific determination of a number and location of
sampler sites.
                                     4-29

-------
                                   SECTION  5
                                  REFERENCES

ASTM.  Annual Book of Standards (published annually).  Part 26, Gaseous Fuels;
Coal and Coke; Atmospheric Analysis.  American Society for Testing and
Materials, Philadelphia, PA.

U.S. EPA., March 1986.  Quality Assurance/Field Operations Methods Manual.
Draft.

U.S. EPA., June 1983.  Technical Assistance Document for Sampling and Analysis
of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air.  EPA-600/4-83-027.  NTIS PB 83-
239020. Office of Research and Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.

U.S. EPA, APril 1984.  Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic
Organic Compounds in Ambient Air. EPA-600/4-84-041.  Office of Research and
Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

NIOSH.  February 1984.  NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods.  NTIS PB 85-
179018.  National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health. Cincinnati, OH.

U.S. EPA.  June 1987.  On-Site Meteorological Program Guidance for Regulatory
Modeling Applications.  EPA-450/4-87-013.  Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

U.S. EPA.  February, 1983.  Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution
Measurements Systems;  Volume IV. Meteorological Measurements.  EPA-600/4-82-
060.  Office of Research and Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

U.S. EPA.  November, 1980.  Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for Prevention of
Significant Deterioration (PSDK  EPA-450/4-80/012.  NTIS PB 81-153231.
Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC
27711.
                                      5-1

-------
U.S. EPA.  July 1986. Guidelines on Air Quality Models (Revised).  EPA-405/2-
78-027R.  NTIS PB 86-245248.  Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards.
Research Triangle Park, NC  27711.

U.S. EPA.  September 1983.  Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites - A
Methods Manual: Volume II. Available Sampling Methods.  EPA-600/4-83-040.
NTIS PB 84-126929.  Office of Solid Waste.  Washington, DC  20460.

U.S. EPA.  September 1983.  Characterization of Hazardous; Waste Sites - A
Methods Manual; Volume III. Available Laboratory Analytical Methods.  EPA-
600/4-83-040.  NTIS PB 84-126929.  Office of Solid Waste.  Washington, DC
20460.

U.S. EPA.  1986.  Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste-. Third Edition.  EPA
WS-846.  GPO No. 955-001-00000-1.  Office of Solid Waste.  Washington, DC
20460.

ASTM.  1982.  Toxic Materials in the Atmosphere.  STP 786.  American Society
for Testing and Materials.  Philadelphia, PA.

ASTM.  1980.  Sampling and Analysis of Toxic Organics in the Atmosphere.  STP
721.  American Society for Testing and Materials.  Philadelphia, PA.

ASTM.  1974.  Instrumentation for Monitoring Air Quality.  STP 555.  American
Society for Testing and Materials.  Philadelphia, PA.

APHA.  1977.  Methods of Air Sampling and Analysis.  American Public Health
Association.  Cincinnati, OH.

ACGIH.  1983.  Air Sampling Instruments for Evaluation of Atmospheric
Contaminants.  American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.
Washington, DC.

U.S. EPA.  1984.  Guide to the Preparation of Quality Assurance Pro.iect Plans.
Office of Toxic Substances.  Office of Pesticides and Toxic Substances.
Washington, DC.

                                      5-2

-------
U.S. EPA.  1988.  Screening Procedures for Estimating the Air Quality Impact
of Stationary Sources.  EPA-450/4-88-010.  Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC, 27711.

U.S. EPA.  1988.  A Workbook of Screening Techniques for Assessing Impacts of
Toxic Air Pollutants.  EPA-450/4-88-009.  Office of Air Quality Planning and
Standards.  Research Triangle Park, NC, 27711.
                                     5-3

-------
              APPENDIX A
BIBLIOGRAPHY OF AIR MONITORING METHODS

-------
                                APPENDIX A

                               BIBLIOGRAPHY
     APCA.  May  1987.    Proceedings  of  the  1987  EPA/APCA  Symposium on
Measurement of  Toxic and  Related Air Pollutants.   VIP-8.  Air Pollution
Control Association.  Pittsburgh, PA  15230.

     These proceedings cover a wide  range  of  topics on recent  advances in
     measurement  and   monitoring   procedures   for  toxic   and   related
     pollutants found in ambient and source atmospheres.

     APHA.  1977.   Methods  of  Air Sampling and Analysis.  American Public
Health Association.   Cincinnati, OH.

     This  manual  is a  comprehensive compilation  of  standardized  methods
     for sampling and analysis of ambient  and workplace air  adopted by the
     APHA Intersociety Committee on Methods of Air Sampling and Analysis.

     ASTM.    1980.    Sampling   and  Analysis  of  Toxic  Organics   in  the
Atmosphere.    American   Society   for Testing  and  Materials.   STP  721.
Philadelphia, PA.

     This publication resulted from  the fourth biennial Boulder Conference
     on  environmental  monitoring of air  quality  sponsored  by the  ASTM.
     The  conference was  structured  to highlight  several major areas of
     concern  to  environmental  scientists,  namely,   sampling  for  toxic
                                    A-2

-------
     organics  1n  ambient,  workplace,  and  source-related  atmospheres;
     analyzing for Important classes of pollutants such as polychlorinated
     biphenyls  (PCBs),  polynuclear  aromatic  hydrocarbons  (PAHs),  and
     polycyclic  organic  matter  (POM); and  measuring  exposure  to  toxic
     organics in the workplace.

     CARB.    February  1985.    Toxic  Ambient  Air  Monitoring  Operation
Procedure. California Network.  Aerometric  Data  Division.   California Air
Resources Board.  Sacramento,  CA 95814.

     CARB.   December  1986.   Testing  Guidelines  for  Active  Solid  Waste
Disposal  Sites.   Stationary  Source Division.   Toxic  Pollutants Branch.
California Air Resources Board.   Sacramento, CA 95814.

     These  guidelines  present   standard  operating  procedures  for  the
     sampling  and  analysis  of  ambient  air  collected  in  Tedlar  bags.
     Analytical procedures are primarily for halogenated volatile organics
     and benzene.

     Drager.   May 1985.    Detector  Tube  Handbook.   Dragerwerk  AG Lubeck.
Federal Republic of Germany.

     This  handbook  presents  procedures  for  the  use  of  colorimetric
     detector tubes  for  a wide  range  of organic  and inorganic compounds.
     Data  is  provided on  standard  ranges  of measurement,  precision and
     accuracy, measurement principles,  and  cross-sensitivity.

     NIOSH.  February  1984.   NIOSH  Manual  of Analytical Methods.   NTIS  PB
85-179018.     National   Institute   of   Occupational   Safety  and  Health.
Cincinnati, OH.

     The  NIOSH  manuals  contain  a  wealth  of information on sampling and
     analytical procedures for a wide range  of toxic organic and  inorganic
     species.    Although primarily  directed at  determination of   worker
     exposure  levels, these  methods  can   quite  often  be  applied   (with
                                    A-3

-------
     minimal modifications)  to the  measurement of  ambient concentration
     levels of concern 1n perimeter and offslte monitoring.

     N.J. DEP.   October  1987.   Ambient A1r  Monitoring  at Hazardous Waste
and  Suoerfund  Sites.   Division  of  Environmental  Quality.   Air Quality
Management  and  Surveillance.    New  Jersey  Department  of Environmental
Protection.  Trenton, NJ 08625.

     This  document  contains  a master  table  of  sampling  and analytical
     methods for ambient  air  monitoring  listed  by  compound  name.   Key
     Information on  species  includes recommended  sampling  and analytical
     methods,  the  applicability  of  each  method,  performance  data,  and
     reference information.

     SCAQMD.  October 1985.  Guidelines for  Implementation of  Rule 1150.1.
South Coast  Air Quality Management  District.   Engineering  Division.    El
Monte, CA 91731.

     This   document   contains   standard   operating   procedures   for  the
     collection  of  ambient  air  samples  at  landfill  perimeters  and  for
     instantaneous  landfill  surface monitoring,  as  well   as analytical
     procedures for a wide range of toxic volatile organic compounds.

     U.S.  EPA.   April  1984.    Compendium of  Methods for  the Determination
of Toxic  Organic Compounds in Ambient Air.   EPA-600/4-84-041.  Office  of
Research and Development.  Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.

     Specific  Standard  Operating  Procedures   (SOPs)   contained   in  this
     compendium are as follows:

     Method TO-1    Method  for  the  Determination  of   Volatile  Organic
                    Compounds  in  Ambient  Air  Using Tenax  Adsorption and
                    Gas    Chromatography/Mass    Spectrometry     (GC/MS).
                    (Applicable to volatile,  non-polar organic  compounds.)
                                    A-4

-------
Method TO-2
Method TO-3
Method TO-4
Method  for  the  Determination  of  Volatile   Organic
Compounds in Ambient Air by Molecular Sieve  Adsorption
and GC/MS.   (Applicable to  highly volatile,  nonpolar
organic compounds.)

Method  for  the  Determination  of  Volatile   Organic
Compounds    in   Ambient     Air    Using    Cryogenic
Preconcentration  Techniques  and  Gas   Chromatography
with Flame  lonization  and  Electron Capture  Detection.
(Applicable to volatile, nonpolar organic compounds.)

Method   for   the   Determination   of    Organochlorine
Pesticides  and  Polychlorinated  Biphenyls  in   Ambient
Air.
Method TO-5
Method for  the  Determination of Aldehydes and  Ketones
in   Ambient  Air   Using   High   Performance   Liquid
Chromatography.
Method TO-6
Method TO-7
Method TO-8
Method  for  the  Determination  of  Phosgene  in  Ambient
Air Using High Performance Liquid Chromatography.

Method for the Determination of  N-Nitrosodimethylamine
in Ambient Air Using Gas Chromatography.

Method   for   the   Determination   of   Phenol    and
Methylphenols  (Cresols)  in Ambient  Air  Using  High
Performance Liquid Chromatography.
Method TO-9
Method   for   the   Determination   of   Polychlorinated
Dibenzo-p-dioxins  (PCDDs)  in Ambient  Air Using  High-
Resolution   Gas   Chromatography/High-Resolution   Mass
Spectrometry (HRGC/HRMS).
                               A-5

-------
     Method TO-12   (Draft)  Method  for the  Determination  of  Non-Methane
                    Organic   Compounds   (NMOC)    1n   Ambient  Air  Using
                    Cryogenic  Preconcentratlon and Direct Flame lonization
                    Detection  (PDFID).

     Method TO-14   Determination of Volatile Organic  Compounds  (VOCs) in
                    Ambient  Air  Using  SUMMA  Passivated  Canister  Sampling
                    and Gas  Chromatographic Analysis.

     U.S. EPA.  September 1983.  Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites
- A Methods Manual;  Volume II. Available Sampling Methods.  EPA-600/4-83-
040.  NTIS PB 84-126929.  Office of Solid  Waste.  Washington, DC  20460.

     This volume is a  compilation  of  sampling methods suitable to address
     most  needs   that  arise   during  routine  waste   site   and  spill
     investigations.   Twelve  methods  are  presented for  ambient  air,  soil
     gases and vapors,  and headspace gases.

     U.S. EPA.  September 1983.  Characterization of Hazardous Waste Sites
- A Methods Manual;  Volume III. Available Laboratory Analytical  Methods.
EPA-600/4-83-040.  NTIS PB 84-126929.  Office of Solid Waste.  Washington,
DC 20460.

     This  volume provides  bench-level guidance  for  the  preparation of
     hazardous  waste,  water,  soil/sediment,  biological  tissue,  and  air
     samples,  and   methods  that  can  be  used  to  analyze  the  resultant
     digests/extracts  of  244  of the substances listed in the  RCRA permit
     regulations.

     U.S. EPA.  February 1986.  Measurement of Gaseous Emission Rates  from
Land Surfaces  Using an  Emission Isolation Flux  Chamber;   User's Guide.
EPA-600/8-86-008.   Environmental   Monitoring  Systems   Laboratory.    Las
Vegas,  NV  89114.
                                    A-6

-------
     U.S.  EPA.    December  1987.   Development  of Collection  Methods for
SemivolatHe  Organic   Compounds   1n  Ambient   A1r.     EPA-600/4-87-042.
Environmental Monitoring Systems  Laboratory.    Research  Triangle Park, NC
27711.

     U.S.  EPA.     July  1983.     Standard  Operating  Procedures  for  the
Preparation of Standard Organic Gas  Mixtures  in a Static Dilution Bottle.
RTP-SOP-EMD-012.    Environmental  Monitoring Systems  Laboratory.   Research
Triangle Park, NC  27711.

     U.S.  EPA.    November  1981.   Standard Operating Procedures  for the
Preparation  of Tenax Cartridges  Containing  Known Quantities  of Orqam'cs
Using  Flash  Vaporization.    RTP-SOP-EMD-011.    Environmental  Monitoring
Systems Laboratory.  Research Triangle Park,  NC  27711.

     U.S.  EPA.    November  1981.   Standard Operating Procedures  for the
Preparation  of Clean Tenax  Cartridges.    RTP-SOP-EMD--013.   Environmental
Monitoring Systems Laboratory.   Research Triangle Park,  NC  27711.

     U.S. EPA.   January 1984.   Standard Operating Procedures for Sampling
Gaseous  Organic   Air Pollutants  for  Quantitative  Analysis  Using  Solid
Adsorbents.      RTP-SOP-EMD-018.       Environmental   Monitoring   Systems
Laboratory.  Research Triangle Park,  NC  27711.

     U.S. EPA.  July 1985.   Draft Standard Operating  Procedures No. FA112A
- Monitoring  for Gaseous  Air  Pollutants  Using  the  Gillian  LFS  Model 113
Dual  Mode  Air Sampling  Pumps.    Environmental Monitoring  and Compliance
Branch,  Environmental  Services  Division,  Region  VII.    Kansas  City, KS
66115.

     U.S.  EPA.   June 1984.   Standard Operating  Procedures  for  the GC/MS
Determination of  Volatile  Organic  Compounds Collected on Tenax.   RTP-SOP-
EMD-021.   Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory.   Research Triangle
Park, NC  27711.
                                    A-7

-------
     U.S. EPA.   August 1983.   Development  of  Protocols for  Ambient Air
   >1inQ and  Monitoring  at Hazardous  Waste Facilities:—Methods Summary
Report.  Office  of Solid Waste.   Land Disposal Branch.   Washington, DC,
20460.

     U.S.  EPA.     1984.    Field  Standard  Operating  Procedures   for Air
Surveillance.    FSOP  18.    Office of  Emergency  and  Remedial  Response.
Washington, DC 20460.

     U.S.  EPA.     1983.    Air  Pollution  Training  Institute  Course  435;
Atmospheric  Sampling.   EPA-450/2-80-004.   Environmental  Research  Center.
Research Triangle  Park, NC  27711.

     U.S.  EPA.    November   1980.    Ambient   Monitoring  Guidelines	for
Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD).   EPA-450/4-80/012.   NTIS  PB
81-153231.    Office  of  Air  Quality  Planning  and  Standards.    Research
Triangle Park, NC  27711.

      U.S.  EPA.   June 1983.   Technical  Assistance Document  for Sampling and
Analysis  of Toxic Organic Compounds  in  Ambient  Air.   EPA-600/4-83-027.
NTIS  PB  83-239020.  Office  of Research and  Development.  Research  Triangle
Park,  NC   27711.

      U.S.  EPA.    1977.    Quality  Assurance  Handbook for  Air  Pollution
Measurement  Systems;   Volume II.  Ambient  Air Specific Methods.  EPA-600/4-
27-027a.   Environmental  Monitoring Systems  Laboratory.   Research  Triangle
 Park, NC  27711.

      U.S.  GSA.   1987.   Code of  Federal Regulations.  Title  40.  Part 50.
Appendices A-G  and  J.   Office of the Federal  Register.    Washington,  DC
 20402.

      The listed appendices to  40 CFR  50  contain EPA Reference Methods for
      the sampling and analysis of SOz, TSP, CO, 03,  N03,  Pb, and PM-10 in
      ambient air.
                                     A-8

-------

-------
         APPENDIX  B
           EXCERPT
             FROM
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE DOCUMENT
             FOR
    SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS
             QF
   TOXIC ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
        IN  AMBIENT  AIR
    (U.S. EPA, JUNE 1983)
             B-l

-------

-------
United State*      Environmental Monitoring     EPA-600/4-83-027
Environmental Protection  Syttema Laboratory       June 1983
Agency        Research Triangle Park NC 27711
Research and Development	
Technical Assistance
Document for
Sampling and
Analysis of Toxic
Organic Compounds in
Ambient Air

-------
                                   CONTENTS


                                                                            Page
Foreward
Preface
                                                                                v
Abstract  .............................................. ....................
Figures	   1X
Tables  	• •	    j
Abbreviations	
     1.  Introduction  	    *
     2.  Regulatory and Related Issues Concerning Toxic
           Organic Monitoring	•	•	    *
     3.  Guidelines  for Development of a Monitoring Plan	    8
               Definition  of Objectives  	•	    *
               Compilation and Evaluation of Available Information  	    1*
               Selection of Sampling and Analysis Methods	    18
               Selection of Sampling Strategy  	    ^J
               Specification of Quality Assurance Protocols	    27
               Definition  of Data Reporting Format	    35
               Safety Considerations	    35
     4.  Sampling and Analysis State of the Art  	    37
               Overview of Sampling Methods  	    37
               Overview of Analytical Methods	    *'
               Methods for Specific Compounds and Compound Classes  	    74
               Quality Assurance Procedures  	    94

 References 	•	
 Appendix	*''   ! 19
 Topic Index	•	

-------
SPECIFICATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE PROTOCOLS

Overview

     Th* term quality assurance (QA) refers to an overall system designed to monitor,
documwt  and control ^Technical performance of a program.  While the need for good
QA «o?oco^ L Sdrfy recognized, the design and implementation of thw. protocol is
f^auLntlv Seated as a secondary part of the overall monitoring program. If the QA
              monlJor^ P^m«e to s«v. a useful purpose, they must (a) be readily
              tthto the cost aSd time constraints of the program, (b) be •VS^f^^f.
                     ^l^M of t~hni~l performance. and (c) be well understood by
             rso. Preparation of the QA plan for a monitoring program should be
           aTSTe sampling strategy and sampling and analysis »«thods have een
oned. This section of the TAD describes ^^e l»portant J
      A simplified view of an overall QA system is given in Figure 4.  QA "tivitie. to be



 f uSns of QA management as well as the specific QA requirements for «mpling,
 analysiTand data redaction are discussed in the following sections of the TAD.

      A series of volumes entitled Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measure-
 QA Management
      The functions and responsibilities of QA management are a ^ticri part of the
 overall monitoring program. These functions and responsibilities are listed in Table 5.













 Jd) control of chain of custody forms documenting sample deposition.
       QA management is responsible for the evaluation of QA data^ m a ti™lj£a«
  Failure to review the data immediately prevents implementation of timely corrective
  action procedures and may result in poor data quality.
                                         27

-------
                            QA
                        Management
  QA
System
Design
Sampling
   QA
Analytic*!
    QA
  Data
Reduction
   QA
       Figure  4.  Quality assurance organization
                             26

-------
                  Table 5.  Quality Assurance (QA) Activities to be
                             Specified in Program Plan
QA Management
          QA System Design
          Document Control
          Data Evaluation and Storage
          Audit Procedures
          Corrective Action
          QA Reports to Program Management
          Training
Sampling QA
          Site Selection
          Instrument Calibration and Maintenance
          Collection of Routine Quality Control Samples
          Data Recording
          Sample Labeling, Preservation, Storage and Transport
          Chain of Custody Procedures
Analytical QA
          Method Validation Requirements
          Instrument Calibration and Maintenance
          Quality Control Sample Analysis
          Data Recording
Data Reduction QA
          Merging Sampling and Analysis Data Files
          Storage of Raw and Intermediate Data
          Data Validation
                                        29

-------
     Audit procedures include both performance and mtem audits.  A performance audit
involves introduction of a reference sample (blank, spike, standard reference material,
etc ) into the analysis system in a blind fashion with subsequent assessment of the data.
System audits involve a review of program documentation such as record notebooks, data
files, and instrument logbooks to assess whether or not the QA system is operating
properly.

     In many cases data review or audit procedures will result in the need for corrective
action. Corrective action may involve repeating certain aspects of the work or simply
providing more detailed documentation for work already performed;. In either case QA
management will be responsible for documenting the need for, type of, and imple-
mentation of corrective actions.

     QA management is responsible for providing scheduled as we]l as nonscheduled
reports to program management.  Scheduled reports include descriptions of the QA system
prior to program implementation, QA  data reports, and audit reports. Unscheduled
reports generally describe corrective actions required and the impact of these actions on
the program.

      A final responsibility of QA management is to provide training to technical
personnel.  In particular, personnel need to be given a detailed view of the QA system and
their responsibilities for its implementation.

Sampling Quality Assurance

      Aspects of sampling to be addressed in the QA plan are shown in Table 5.  Site
•electionconsiderations have been discussed in the section on sampling strategy develop-
ment. However, the QA plan should specify factors which could result in a modification
of the siting plan during the course of the monitoring effort (e.g., changes in source
location or characteristics) and provisions for documenting any such modifications.

       Instrument maintenance and calibration procedures should be specified to the extent
possible in the QA plan.  Any maintenance or calibration activity, scheduled or non-
 scheduled, should be recorded in an appropriate logbook in order to determine any effects
 on the data obtained. Typical calibration data obtained should include:

       •  Flow measurements
       •  Volume measurements
       •  Temperature measurements
       •  Pressure measurements
       e  Determination of response factors, precision, and accuracy for
         continuous monitors using span gases and zero gases.

 In general the QA plan should specify routine calibration checks at several time points
 during the program.
       Quality control samples to check overall system performance may include «
 or split samples, spiked samples, standard reference materials, blanks, and backup
 ".£ series impinlers or resin cartridges).  Split or replicate samples are useful checks on
 sampling and analysis precision and should be included with each group of samples. Field
 bUaksjB which the sampling activity is duplicated exactly except that no air is sampled,
 should also be routinely collected. Backup  samples should be collected whenever  the
                                           30

-------
recovery performance of a particular sampling medium has not been documented or is
subject to wide variations depending on ambient conditions. Spiked samples should be
included wherever an accurate spiking procedure is available, provided that the spiked
material reasonably simulates the physical and chemical state of the native material.

     Standard reference materials (SRMs) for organic analysis are rather sparse.  The
National Bureau of Standards (NBS) has certified an urban dust (SRM 1649) for selected
polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons and various gas suppliers will prepare certified
standards of many organic components as dilute gas mixtures. These gas mixtures should
be checked against NBS standard reference materials (e.g., propane in air) to ensure
accuracy of the gas mixture.  Routine calibration of continuous monitors using these
certified gas mixtures is highly advisable.  SRMs containing selected organic compounds
at trace levels in  air or nitrogen are presently being developed and should be available in
the near future from NBS.

     Data recording procedures to be specified in the sampling QA plan include (a)
periodic readings  of the temperature,  flow, volumes, and other parameters, (b) docu-
mentation of meteorological conditions at appropriate time points, (c) documentation of
instrument operating variables (e.g., resin cartridge number), (d) documentation of any
upset conditions such as sudden leakage or pressure surges, and (e) documentation of
calibration or maintenance activities. A logbook for the overall sampling program in
which sampling descriptions, meteorological data, and upset conditions arc documented
should be maintained. In addition a sampling data sheet, such as the example in Figure 5,
should be prepared for each sample or set of samples in which the periodic  readings and
instrument parameters are recorded.  Certain measurements such as filter numbers and
weights or impinger volumes which are required for analytical purposes can be recorded
on a separate sheet with provisions for recording subsequent analytical data on the same
sheet.  Separate maintenance and calibration logbooks should  be maintained for each
instrument. In most cases, sampling data forms specific for a given program must be
prepared because of differences in the sampling design between programs.

     Sample labeling, preservation, storage, and transport procedures should be specified
in the QA plan  and these procedures should be carefully explained to field personnel prior
to sampling to ensure proper implementation.  Sample labels,  prepared in advance,  should
include sufficient information to associate the sample with a particular data sheet  as well
as  the overall program record notebook.  In general each sample should be given a  unique
identification number with a prefix describing the type of sample.

     Sample preservation, storage, and transport procedures  must  be appropriate for the
type of analyses required. Participate samples generally should be placed in air tight
containers and  stored in the dark to minimize analyte degradation. Resin cartridges and
impingers generally require more attention, because of analyte instability in the  matrix,
and should be shipped to the laboratory for analysis within a relatively short  time period
(e.g., a few days). These sample types should be placed in airtight, glass containers and
stored at subambient temperatures until analysis.  Exposure to solvents must be avoided
for resin cartridges during all stages of handling in order to avoid sample contamination.

     Chain of  custody forms are required for certain programs having direct legal impli-
cations.  The objective of the chain of custody procedures is to document the movement
of a sample from collection until analysis to ensure its integrity. A typical chain of
custody form is shown in Figure 6. Formal chain of custody requirements place a sub-
stantial burden on the field as well as laboratory personnel and should be employed only


                                         31

-------
S«*pte Sample SUrt
I.D. Description Date TUw








































Stop
Tt*e Location




















Flow Rate.
liter/Bin.
Inlt. Final










Ataospheric Calibration
Pressure leap. • Data
•rift} *C Operator Reference Convents


















































Figure 5.  Typical  samplinq data sheet

-------
                          CHAIN OF CUSTODY RECORD
Sample Number:

Shipper Name: „
Address:
      number       street    city     state  zip

Collector's Name__	Telephone: (	)	
             signature

Date Sampled	Time Sampled	hours

Type of Process Producing Waste	—,	

Field Information		
Sample Receiver:

1.
    name and address of organization receiving sample

 2.		—

 3	_	—
 Chain of Possession:

 1.
    signature         title    .      inclusive dates

 2.
    signature        title          inclusive dates

 3.
    signature        title          inclusive dates
                       Figure 6. Typical Chain of Custody Form
                                         33

-------
when the program objective specifically require such measures. However, if the data
obtained are to be used in litigation, the use of chain of custody procedures is mandatory.

Analytical Quality Assurance

     Aspects of the analytical work to be addressed in the QA plan include:

     e  Method validation requirements
     e  Instrument maintenance and calibration
     e  Quality control sample analysis
     e  Data recording.

     Most monitoring programs will use new methods or modifications of existing
methods to some extent. The  QA plan must address the validation requirements for each
of these methods.  Typical requirements will include determination of precision, accuracy,
detection  limit, and specificity through the analysis of laboratory standards, and whenever
possible, representative samples.  The validation requirements should be appropriate for
the program objectives and should simulate the actual sampling and Analytical situation as
nearly as possible.  Validation  data should be included as part of the monitoring report and
method writeups and any limitations of the data in terms of defining the performance
characteristics under the actual use conditions should be documented.

     Instrument maintenance and calibration requirements for laboratory instruments
will be similar to those for field instruments, including the need to document any
activities  of this type. To the extent possible calibration and preventive maintenance
schedules  should be included in the QA plan. The format for recording calibration data
(e.g., injection of standards of known concentration) should be specified prior to initiation
of the monitoring effort.

     Quality control samples  for evaluating analytical performance should include blanks,
spiked process blanks, spiked samples, standard reference materials, and replicate (or
split) samples.  Standard reference  materials and replicate or split samples should
generally  be included as part of field QA and need not be additionally included at the
analysis stage. However additional blanks, spiked process blanks, and spiked samples
should be  included at the analysis stage since problems with sample instability and con-
tamination during sampling storage or shipment can be determined separately from
laboratory related problems. Both spiked process blanks and spiked samples should be
included since this practice allows matrix effects to be distinguished! from analytical
losses.

      Data recording requirements during analysis require a great deal of attention to
ensure that  all necessary raw  data are available  for inspection should unexpected results
occur.  The advent  of computerized data handling tends to "hide" raw data from the
analyst. Hence the QA plan should specifically state  which raw data are to  be recorded,
the manner of presentation, and storage procedures.  Laboratory data notebooks should
include all raw data or a clear reference as to where the data are recorded (e.g., 9-track
magnetic tape, etc.), equations used in performing intermediate calculations, and final
results. Equations  used for calculations, including units for all parameters,  should be
presented as part of the method writeups or program QA plan.
                                          34

-------
Data Reduction Quality Assurance

     Since sampling and analytical data processing occurs independently, in most cases,
the QA plan should address the manner in which data from the two activities are to be
treated and validated during the reduction process.  The actual presentation of data is
described in the following portion of the TAD and will not be discussed here.

     Aspects of data reduction to be treated in the QA plan are shown in Table 5.  The
extent of documentation and verification required will be greatly dependent on the
program  objectives, the nature of the raw data, and the complexity of the computational
process.


DEFINITION OF DATA REPORTING FORMAT

     Many air monitoring programs are undertaken without prior definition of the data
reporting format. In some cases this appraoch is justified because of the unexpected
nature of the data obtained (e.g., unexpected compounds detected or previously unknown
sources identified).  However, to the extent possible the format for data presentation
should be defined  prior to  initiation of the monitoring effort.  This practice helps to
identify limitations on  the available data and further clarifies the extent to which tech-
nical and management  or policy personnel understand the program objectives.  Stern's Air
Pollution series") contains an excellent discussion of procedures for analyzing and
presenting air quality data.

     The optimal format  for data presentation obviously is highly dependent on the
program  objectives  and the quantity of data obtained. In cases where only a few data
points are obtained  around a point source (e.g., a hazardous waste landfill) tabular
presentation of data (compound concentrations at each site) may be appropriate.
However, in most monitoring situations the quantity and complexity of the data set will
require graphical  presentation.  This type of data format requires definition of the
important variables to  be  considered (e.g., source locations, sampling times, sampling
sites, meteorological effects, etc.). Statistical methods for evaluating correlation
between  the important variables are usually required to obtain meaningful conclusions
from the data set. Typical methods for statistically evaluating and displaying air quality
data are  given in  Stern's book^) and therefore are not presented here.


SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

     Safety considerations in air monitoring are similar to those for other chemically
related occupations but should be considered for each air monitoring program since
unusual hazards may be present in these situations.  A discussion of general safety con-
siderations is available^.  Potential safety hazards can be subdivided into the following
broad categories:

     •   Chemical hazards
     e   Electrical equipment
     e   Mechanical equipment.

     Chemical hazards include toxic chemicals such as carcinogenic compounds,
corrosive chemicals such as concentrated acids or bases, and  explosive hazards such as
                                          35

-------
compressed gases.  Protective equipment should be employed to miinimixe direct exposure
to such haxards. Since most air monitoring programs require working with concentrated
standards of toxic organic compounds, special emphasis should be placed on minimizing
exposure to these materials. Programs involving investigation of concentrated or
potentially concentrated sources of hazardous organic compounds require additional
safety protocols to protect workers in the field as well as laboratory workers who could be
unexpectedly exposed to concentrated samples collected at such sites.

     Haxards from corrosive chemical, compressed gases, glassware, mechanical
equipment, and electrical equipment are presented in the reference given above^' and do
not require special emphasis here. However, these haxards should be addressed in the
monitoring plan.
                                          36

-------
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES

     The purpose of this part of the TAD is to address quality assurance and related
needs specific for the sampling and analysis approaches described above.  The overall QA
requirements of ambient air monitoring programs have been described in Section 3 of the
TAD and references
Method Validation

     Validation of method performance is important in all sampling and analysis programs
but is of special significance for trace organic monitoring because of the large number of
compounds of interest and variables affecting method performance. In many situations
time, cost, or technical limitations will preclude rigorous method validation and certain
assumptions will be required.  Ideally any such assumptions will be based on sound tech-
nical judgement and/or prior experience.

      Aspects of method performance requiring validation include the following:

         Accuracy
         Precision
         Blank or background level
         Detection limit
         Interferences
         Ruggedness (effect of important variables on method performance).

In the ideal situation each of these aspects of method performance will be evaluated using
the entire sampling and analysis scheme to monitor an atmosphere containing constant,
known amounts of the analytes under conditions identical to the field. Two technical
limitations prevent the accomplishment of this "ideal" method validation strategy in most
cases.

      The most severe limitation is that duplication of field conditions is impossible
because of the wide variability in field conditions. The second limitation is that gener-
ating atmospheres of known constant composition is relatively difficult, especially for
unstable components which also pose the greatest problem for sampling and analysis.

      A typical approach used  to partially overcome these limitations is shown in Figure
12.  In this scheme a laboratory validation effort is conducted wherein the emphasis is


                                         94

-------
                   Generate atmosphere under laboratory conditions
                    containing known, constant amount of analyte.
                   For unstable compounds use dry inert gas and/or
                    reference analysis methods to ensure a known,
                                stable concentration.
Laboratory
                   Determine method detection limit, and accuracy
                     and check interference from known materials
                      using the laboratory generated atmosphere.
                      Determine method "ruggedness" by varying
                   temperature, humidity, sampling volumes, ei:c. in
                 cases where a stable concentration of analyte can be
                 maintained.  Use series samples to check breakthrough
                                 when appropriate.
                       Determine method precision by collecting
                                  parallel samples.
Field
                  Estimate method accuracy by comparing data using
                      test and reference methods, running series
                       samples (check on breakthrough), and/oir
                       spiking field sample with known amounts
                                     of analyte.
                         Figure 12. Method Validation Scheme
                                         95

-------
       on generating a known, stable concentration of analyte. Unstable compound! may
     • U»J™of dry, inert gas (e.g., nitrogen) to make up the atmosphere. In some cases
         -S^Wr.S3abli " • dick on compound stability  such method, r*ed
not be  highly specific since a relatively clean atmosphere is being employed).

     Method detection limit, precision, accuracy, interferences, and background.can 1be»
determined using the laboratory generated atmosphere.  Method ruggedness can be tested
provided the variables do not affect the analyte stability, unstable compounds often will
not meet this requirement.

     The field method validation efforts include a check on precision using parallel
sampling. Accuracy can be estimated through the use of reference or alternate methods,
a^/o7sriking field samples with known quantities of analyte.  The latter approach must
bVaccompSshed in such a manner that all of the spiked material enters the sampling
device.  Alternatively, one can choose to spike the collected sample (e.g., impinger
liquid! resfacartridge etc.) a. a check only on the sample transport and ™*J^
p^ceduresV  Series Samplers can be used as a check on capture efficiency (analyte
breakthrough) but will not determine accuracy, fa many cases, it.will be useful to
collect series samples using various sampling volumes to further document component
breakthrough characteristics.
 Instrument Calibration
      Instrument calibration requirements for sampling and analysis equipment are
 outlined in Table 19. Specific calibration and maintenance procedures will vary somewhat
 from^ne manufacturerTo another, hence the user should consult the instrument manual
 for more specific information.

      Sampling equipment calibration procedures for toxic organic monitoring are similar
 to other type-To?monitoring and adequate information on this subject can be found in the
 literature?!®. Continuous analyxers require that a suitable calibration standard be
 available in the field. Ideally the calibration standard is a dilute mixture or series of
 dilute mixtures of the analyte at stable concentrations.  Methods for genera ting such
 atmosphere, can be static (e.g., dilution flasks, compressed gas cylinders) or *V*™
 ?e.g., permeation tube,, diffusion tubes, syringe delivery systems .  In all cases, a method
 of generating clean air must be available in order to set the baseline level on the con-
 UnSout monitor as well a. for the generation of calibration standards. Methods for gener-
 ating clean air as well as static and dynamic calibration methods are discussed in the
 literature^).

      fa general, static systems are most convenient to use and are the preferred cali-
 bration methodi provided the analyte, are stable in the dilution system. GenerallyAlight
 hvdrocarbons and other stable, volatile compounds (e.g., halocarbons) are suitable for
 static calibration.  Dynamic calibration systems, while more complex for field use, are
 often rAuLed for reactive materials (e.g. phosgene) which may be degraded in the static
 systems.

       Less volatile  materials such as PCBs, organochlorine, pesticides, or PAHs are  rarely
 of interest for continuous monitors since the ambient concentrations of  these materials
 are usually not detectable using this approach. If atmospheres of such compounds are to
 be generated probably the best approach is a heated dynamic dilution system wherein a
 dilute solution of the material in a volatile solvent is delivered at a constant rate into the
 gas stream using a  syringe pump.
                                           96

-------
                    TABLE  19.   CALIBRATION  REQUIREMENTS  FOR  SAMPLING
                                    AND ANALYSIS  INSTRUMENTATION
       Device
                            Parameter
                            Calibrated
                        Method of
                        Calibration
                       Appro*Imate
                        Frequency
                                             Comments
Sampling Instrumentation

Sempllnq pump and
  controller
Sortie volume measurement
  device (usually a dry
  test oxter)
MM rate
                             Total volume
Net or dry test         Meekly
meter or calibrated
rotometer

Met test meter         Meekly
                                                             Must be determined at
                                                             knoM atmospheric pressure
                                                             and temperature.  Flew
                                                             rate should be startler to
                                                             that used for sampling.
Analytical Instruments

Continuous oanltors
   (e.fl.. FIO. »ID. TfO.
   etc.)
 Chrometographlc
   Instrunents
 Chronotooraiihlc
   iMtruncnts
 CC/HS
 GC/NS
•espouse
 ColiMn perforaance
 and retention
 tine for each
 analyte
 Response for
 each analyte

 Response and
 retention ttae
 for each analyte

 Mass spectral
 resolution and
 turning parameters
Ceneratlon of test
tUosphere of
known concentration
                                              Dally or
 Injection of
 standard ustnf
 the sane process
 as for stople
 Injection

 Sane as above
                                              frequently
                                              If required
                                                                          Dally or
                                                                           frequently
                                                                           If required
                                      Test atnosphere should be
                                      referenced to a prlnery
                                      standard (e.e.. MS bentene
                                      In air).  Flow/pressure
                                      conditions should duplicate
                                      sanpllnf process.

                                      Standard composition
                                      should be checked analnst
                                      prtnary standards If
                                      available.
                                                                               as
                                                           Sea* as for other chroMtooraphlc Instruments.
(a) Introduction
of perfluoro-
compound directly
Into MS
(b)  Injection of
tuning standard
(e.e.. bromofluero-
bentene) Into tt
                                                                           Dally
                                        Selection of tunlnj
                                        standards will be
                                        dependent on type of
                                        of analysis betne.
                                        pcrfomed.

-------
     Chromatographic instrumentation requires calibration of both the retention time
and response characteristics of the analytes under the conditions used for the analysis of
samples. Samples delivered to the instrument in liquid form (e.g., XAO or PUF extracts,
impingers, etc),  represent no particular problems since liquid standards of the analytes
may be readily prepared.  However, techniques such as whole air injection, cryogenic
trapping, and thermal desorption (e.g., Tenax) require the generation of a known, stable
gas phase calibration standard, using methods similar to those described for  continuous
monitors. In the case of the Tenax thermal desorption method standards have been suc-
cessfully prepared using a heated static dilution flask wherein the sample is  injected onto
a clean Tenax cartridge using a gas-tight syringe.

     The performance of GC columns, especially capillary columns should be checked
periodically in terms of column efficiency (theoretical plates) and peak asymmetry
(especially for polar compounds). This performance check can be done using liquid cali-
bration standards and is a useful tool for determining when a column needs to be replaced.

     Mass spectrometers require various calibration steps, in addition to the normal
Chromatographic calibration requirements. These include calibration of the mass spectral
relative intensities and mass resolution.  Quadrupole MS systems are greatly effected by
such tuning parameters and hence data performance checks are required to ensure the
usefulness of the mass spectrum for peak identification.

     In practice, two levels of MS tuning calibration are usually performed. First a
volatile perfluoro-compound (e.g., perfluorokerosine or perfluorotributylamine) is intro-
duced  into the ion source  and the MS tuning parameters are adjusted to yield certain
spectral characteristics.  This tuning process is usually described in detail in the instru-
ment manual. A second level of tuning involves the injection of a particular compound
EPA methodology (70) prescribes bromofluorobenzene for volatile! and decafluorotri-
phenylphosphine (DFTPP) for s« mi volatile compounds onto the GC/MS system.  If  the
mass spectral characteristics for the reference compound are not correct, the parameters
are  adjusted and the calibration process repeated.

Routine Quality Control

      In addition to method validation and instrument calibration processes, the mon-
itoring program should include certain processes for periodically documenting per-
formance of the sampling and analysis procedures.  Typical frequencies for  sampling/
analysis QC samples are shown in Table 20. In the case of continuous monitors  the cali-
bration process itself serves as a periodic indicator of method performance. Other
sampling and  analysis systems require the collection or acquisition of QC samples to
check method performance.  The types of QC samples of primary value include:

         Blanks (both field and laboratory)
         Spiked samples
         Internal standards
         Replicate parallel samples (or split  samples)
         Series samples
         Reference samples.

      Blanks should be processed exactly as the samples, except that no air is drawn
through the sampler. If samples are transported to the laboratory for analysis then labo-
ratory as well as field blanks should be included.  In the case of resin samples (e.g., Tenax)


                                          98

-------
                  Table 20.  Typical Sampling/Analysil Frequencies
                                 for QC Samples
         Type of Sample
Field  Blanks

Laboratory Blanks

Spiked Samples
Duplicate (parallel) Samples

Instrument Calibration Standards
Reference Samples
Series (Backup) Samples
          Typical Frequency
Each Sample Set; at least 10% of
total number of samples.
Daily; at least 10% of total number
of samples. Each batch of samples.
Each sample set; weekly
    of total number of samples; each
sample set.
Daily
Weekly
Each sample set.
                                        99

-------
          Ltory and field blanks should be routinely analyzed since contamination during
          rfToM^febSm: Material blanks such as Tenax cartridges, impinger so-
          • should be routinely analyzed prior to sampling to avoid wasting valuable field
•tton, ai»"to contamination. Blanks for whole air coUection or cryogenic trapping
Systems will simply be clean air as used for instrument calibration.

     Sulked samples must be prepared in such a manner that (a) the sample form is not
     S*£3& proce-SJto) aU of the spikematerial is availabletc> th.-mpUng
alter* by thsrfk    proce»n     a  o   e sp
!«£m  fa manVcwSsVthe air stream itself cannot be spiked because of technical practi-
                     * thTmost common approach i, to spike the collection matrix (e.g.
             nnger; etc.) either before or after sampling. Rerin cartridges can be
            themtic dilution system described above, fa "menses (e.g., for volatile,
Sable compounds) a whole air sample can be collected in a cylinder or Teflon bag and
spiked with a known amount of analyte.

      The use of internal standards (IS) is advisable for chromatographic methodi it or
which the IS can be placed into the sample without altering it.  The use of an IS helps to
Irac" instrument sensitivity and to compensate for losses during sample processing.
fa"^S3Sd/lr. uncommonly employed for liquid injection or thermal *••**£*«
methods butsrenot advisable for whole air injection or cryogenic trapping m most cases.
faurnaf standards are especially useful for GC/MS techniques since the stable isotopicmUy
S r^eut^umTr 13C) Sbeled7analyte, can be placed into the sample "t"^""16
for any losses during processing or changes in instrument response.  This approach has
been used extensively for Tenax thermal desorption procedures.
         clnnot due to inhomojeneous distribution of the analytes in the

      CoUection of replicate samples of varying sample volumes can be useful! for deter-
 mining sampling volume effects on the method.  Series samples are     w"d
 check on
 solid adsorbent sampling procedures^00'.

       Reference samples, especially standards available from NBS, are useful as a routine
       on mr5^i"ccLracV although only a limited number of such samples are available.
         rtududTfor organics (Zg., benzene) will become avaUable in the near future
     w  ^ o^r7at valJ! in the to'xic organic monitoring area. Secondary standard, ,»p-
 Jlied  by varioul manufacturers and caUbrated against an NBS reference (e.g., propane in
 ak) are currently in widespread use both of instrument calibration and routine 
-------
     Most of the NIOSH and ASTM methods contain equations for converting raw ana-
lytical data to final concentrations, many of which are applicable to other sampling and
analysis methods.  Raw data obtained during the sampling and analysis process should
include the following:

     •  Volume of sample collected (uncorrected for ambient pressure and
        temperature)-VsA                  .     A    _
     •  Temperature of sample volume measuring system-TS
     •  Ambient atmospheric pressure at sampling site-Ps
     e  Quantity of analyte in total sample-Ox*

     T« -imn.t all cases. the final data should be presented in terms of quantity of
analyt^"uSt^oSmt u^Jer standard condition, (25 C and 760 mm Hg press,*.).
A^Sal sTmplTvolume can be  converted to standard sample volume V& using the
following equation:

                                     ,         298        PjjdnmHg)
                         m3) » VCA (™3) * - *
                         =     5A
 The concentration of analyte (CA) in the sample under standard conditions can then be
 readily calculated as follows:
      T« m.,w r,«*. one mav wish to convert concentrations from pg/m3 to parts per



 gw phase components at 25 C and 760 mm pressure:
                             CA (ppbv) = CA (Hi/™3)

       where MWA • molecular weight of analyte.




  ppbC:
                                                     NC
                                          101

-------
•h«re Nr - the number of carbons in the analyte molecule. In a strict sense the term
Job?should be reserved for hydrocarbons since the presence of O, d, N, etc. greatly
affects the per carbon response of the FID.
                                          102

-------
      APPENDIX C
BACKGROUND INFORMATION
         C-l

-------
                                APPENDIX C

                          BACKGROUND INFORMATION
     Preparation  and  implementation  of  an  Air  Pathway  Analysis   (APA)
Emergency  Field   Guide  is  recommended   to   support  site   disturbance
activities.   For  example, excavation during  remedial/removal   actions  can
result  in an unplanned  release  of  hazardous  contaminants  to  the  air
pathway.   Implementation of  a  site/source-specific  APA  Field Guide  can
provide  a  real-time  capability  to  provide  the following   information
regarding  an  unplanned  air  release  event  during  the  remedial/removal
activities:

          Identification of the impact area

     •    Estimation of arrival time of  release at the impact area

     •    Air  concentration  predictions for the  impact area  that can  be
          compared  to  health  and  safety action  levels,  ARARs,  and  odor
          thresholds

     An APA Field Guide  is  based on a strategy that  involves a systematic
combination  of modeling and  monitoring  methods.    Procedures  for  the
conduct of emission rate modeling/monitoring for disturbed-site conditions
have  been provided  in  Volume  III.   Procedures  for dispersion  and  air
monitoring  have   been   presented  in  Volume  IV,   Sections   2  and   3,
respectively.  The following is an example APA Field Guide.
                                    C-2

-------
               APPENDIX C - EXAMPLE APA FIELD GUIDE OUTLINE

C.I   Overview
      C.I.I   Objectives
      C.I.2   Site/Source Description
      C.I.3   A1r Pathway Analysis Uncertainty

C.2   Air Pathway Analysis Strategy
      C.2.1   Routine Meteorological  Monitoring
      C.2.2   Routine Air Monitoring
      C.2.3   Release Assessment Methodology
                                    C-3

-------
C.I       OVERVIEW

C.I.I     Objectives

     This  Field  Guide  has  been prepared  to provide  a basis  for onsite
decision-makers to  obtain rapid  assessments of potential downwind  (onsite
and  offsite)   concentrations  1n  the  event of  nonroutine  air  emissions
during   remedial   actions.     Specific   information   obtainable  by   the
application of the  Field Guide includes  an  estimate of  the  Impact area  and
release  arrival  times  at  downwind  locations  of  interest,  as  well  as  a
prediction of  air concentration.  The  Field  Guide has been developed  for
use  by  onsite health  and  safety staff.   Familiarity  with the  procedural
instructions of  this Field  Guide will  allow  an  assessment in a  matter of
minutes.

C.I.2     Site/Source  Description

     Site  X  1s located on  flat  terrain in a community that has  a mix of
small  industrial  plants  and residential  housing.   The closest resident
lives  approximately  1 kilometer  from  the uncontrolled  landfill at  the
site.    The  primary air emission  source during  site  remediation  will be
excavation  operations; numerous volatile organic  compounds  (VOCs) will be
emitted.

      Candidate air  emission  constituents  of  concern   identified  from  air
pathway    analyses     (APAs)     conducted     during     the     Remedial
 Investigation/Feasibility Study  (RI/FS) include  the  following  VOCs:

      •     Benzene
      •     Carbon tetrachloride
           Chloroform
           Ethyl  benzene
      •     Tetrachloroethane
           Tetrach1oroethy1ene

      Moist soil  conditions  are expected  to minimize the potential  for
 particulate emissions during excavation operations.
                                     C-4

-------
C.I.3          A1r Pathway Analysis  Uncertainty

     Because of  monitoring  and  modeling  uncertainties,  Field  Guide air
concentration predictions  should  be used  for decision-making.   For this
application, the  Industrial  Source Complex  Short-Term (ISCST) dispersion
model was used.  Portable organic detectors and colorimetric tubes are the
primary monitoring methods for this application.   Therefore, the combined
Uncertainty  Factor   (UF)   of  ±5  for   Field   Guide  air  concentration
predictions has been  estimated  for continuous releases.   A UF of ±10 has
been assumed for instantaneous (puff) releases.

     The  UFs  discussed  above refer to  maximum  (i.e.,  plume  center!ine)
concentrations at  downwind  locations  of  interest.  However, for  real-time
applications   there   is   the   potential   for   large   wind   direction
variabilities.   Therefore,  for this application  it  has been  assumed that
the  maximum concentrations,  as  a function of downwind distance,  can occur
anywhere  within  the  horizontal  boundaries of the impact area.   The  impact
area has  been conservatively defined  as  the plume  center-line ±3 sigma  y
(where  sigma  y   is   the  horizontal  dispersion parameter).  Typically,
concentrations  at ±3 sigma y are  approximately  a factor of 0.05  of plume
center!ine  values.

      The  application  of this Field  Guide is  intended  for releases that can
be  characterized  as  neutrally  buoyant.    Additionally,  the  modeling
approach  selected  is based  on  the assumption  that  chemical  or physical
removal mechanisms in the atmosphere  are negligible.
                                     C-5

-------
C.2       AIR PATHWAY ANALYSIS STRATEGY

     The APA  strategy developed  for this  Field  Guide  1s  Illustrated  1n
Figure C-l.   Routine onslte meteorological  monitoring should be conducted
to  ensure  that  Input data are  available  for  characterizing  dispersion
conditions.    Routine  air  monitoring  close  to  the  source  should   be
conducted  during  excavation operations  to  detect  nonroutine  air release
conditions.    If  a  nonroutine  release  1s  detected,  then  the multistep
release  assessment  methodology presented  in this  Field Guide  should  be
implemented.   This  methodology  involves  plume  measurements   (horizontal
traverse)  10  meters  downwind from the  source.   The maximum concentration
detected 10 meters from  the source is extrapolated using dilution factors
(based on  dispersion modeling results)  to  obtain concentration estimates
at  downwind  locations of  interest.    Acetate overlays  (stability class-
specific)  are used   in  conjunction  with   a  site  base  map to   identify
potential  impact areas.

C.2.1     Routine Meteorological Monitoring

     A 10-meter  meteorological  station  should  be  operated  onslte during
the site remediation phase.  At a minimum, wind speed, wind direction,  and
sigma theta should be  measured.   Sigma theta 1s the standard deviation  of
horizontal   wind  direction;  1t  is  used  as  an  'indicator  of   atmospheric
stability.   The averaging  time  for the measurements should be  15  minutes.
An  onsite   data   logger   is  planned   to facilitate   obtaining  15-minute
averaged meteorological data automatically.

C.2.2     Routine Air Monitoring

     Routine  air  monitoring  during  the remedial  action  phase   will   be
limited  to near-source measurements  using  portable  organic  detectors  and
compound-specific colorimetric  tubes.    As  warranted,  additional   downwind
sampling will also be  implemented.   An onsite gas chromatograph will also
be available to conduct confirmatory  compound-specific analyses.
                                    C-6

-------
                   Routine Air
                 (Near-Source)
                   Monitoring
   Routine
Meteorological
  Monitoring
                   Implement
             Reieaae  Aaaeaament
             	 Methodology
            o Stap 1 - Collect input
              Data

            o Stap 2 - Datarmlna
              Impact Araa

            o Stap 3 - Datarmlna
              Dilution Faotora

            o Stap 4 - Eatlmata
              Downwind Coneantratlona

            o Stap 5 - Compara
              Coneantratlona to Action
              Lavala. Haalth Crltarla,
              and Odor Thraaholda
               Repeat Procedure
                 Aa  Necessary
Rgur* C-1.  APA Em«rg«noy Fl»ld Quid* Strategy - Ov*rvl*w.
                          C-7

-------
C.2.3          Release Assessment Methodology

     The  release   assessment   methodology  presented   below   should  be
implemented 1f  a nonroutine air release  is detected  (via  monitoring or
visual observation).

Step 1 - Collect Input Data

     •    Measure  maximum  air   concentrations   based   on  a  horizontal
          traverse of the plume at 10 meters from the downwind edge of the
          source.

               Total  organic  concentrations  based  on   portable  detector
               measurements.

               Specific organic  concentrations based  on colorimetric  tube
               samples.

               Whole  air  samples  subject to  onsite gas  chromatographic
               analyses as confirmatory information.

     •    If air  concentration  measurements  are not  available,  consider
          the use of default emission rate scenarios  (Table C-l).

          Collect  onsite  meteorological   data   using   the  most  recently
          available 15-minute averages.

               Wind direction.

               Wind speed.

               Atmospheric stability  (based  on  sigma theta classification
               presented in Table C-2).
                                    C-8

-------
TABLE C-l.  DEFAULT EMISSION RATE SCENARIOS TOR SITE X

Continuous Point Source
Benzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chloroform
Ethyl Benzene
Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachloroethylene
Continuous Area Source
Benzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chloroform
Ethyl Benzene
Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachloroethylene
Instantaneous Source
Benzene
Carbon tetrachloride
Chloroform
Ethyl Benzene
Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachl oroethy 1 ene
Typical
Emission
Rates
(ug/sec)
















Release
omposition
(percent)
10
20
30
5
15
_20
100









Worst Case
mission
Rates
ug/sec)
















Release
omposition
(percent)
















                           C-9

-------
         TABLE C-2.  SIGMA THETA STABILITY CLASSIFICATION
               Sigma  Theta  Value
Classification
Sigma theta greater than or equal to 12.5°
Sigma theta greater than or equal to 7.5° but
less than 12.5°
Sigma theta less than 7.5°
   Unstable
    Neutral

    Stable
                               C-10

-------
Step 2 - Determine Impact Area

     •    Select the appropriate Impact area overlay set as follows:

               Continuous point source (Figures  C-2  through C-4).
               Continuous area source (Figures C-2 through  C-4).
               Instantaneous source (Figures C-5 through C-7).

     •    Select  the  stability-specific   impact  area  overlay  from  the
          appropriate set of figures:

               Unstable.
               Neutral.
               Stable.

     •    Align  the  overlay  over the  base map  (Figure  C-8) along  the
          direction  toward  which  the  wind is  flowing.   (Wind  direction
          data obtained  from  the meteorological station will  be  in terms
          of direction from which the wind is flowing.)  The result should
          be that  the  impact area is  located  downwind of  the source, as
          illustrated in  Figure C-9.
                                   C-ll

-------
UNSTABLE CONDITIONS'
Rtl«att Point
         *Example overlay. Do not directly use this overlay for site applications. Site-
         specific values should be developed for actual calculations.


         Figure C-2  Example Impact Area Overlay-Continuous Sources (Unstable
                   Conditions)
                                   C-12

-------
NEUTRAL CONDITIONS*
Point
         *Example overlay. Do not directly use this overlay for site applications. Site-
         specific values should be developed for actual applications.

         Figure C-3   Example Impact Area Overlay-Continuous Sources (Neutral
                   Conditions)
                                    C-13

-------
     STABLE
     CONDITIONS
R«l«as« Point
*Example overlay. Do not directly use this overlay for site applications. Site-
specific values should be developed for actual applications.

Figure C-4  Example Impact Area Overlay-Continuous Sources (Stable
          Conditions)
                            C-14

-------
UNSTABLE CONDITIONS*
Point
          *Example overlay. Do not directly use this overlay for site applications. Site-
          specific values should be developed for actual applications.

          Figure C-5  Example Impact Area Overlay - Instantaneous Sources (Unstable
                    Conditions)
                                     C-15

-------
     NEUTRAL
     CONDITIONS
R«l«at« Point
*Example overlay. Do not directly use this overlay for site applications. Site-
specific values should be developed for actual applications.

Figure C-6  Example Impact Area Overlays - Instantaneous Sources (Neutral
          Conditions)
                           C-16

-------
 STABLE
 CONDITIONS
Point
'Example overlay. Do not directly use this overlay foir site applications. Site-
specific values should be developed for actual applications.

Figure C-7  Example Impact Area Overlays - Instantaneous Sources (Stable
          Conditions)
                             C-17

-------
w
                                                             Actual Offsite
                                                             Receptor (with
                                                             expected maximum
                                                             release impact)
to  ff
             Figure C-8  Example Base Map-Site X
                                         C-18

-------
            Wind
           OirwttoiT
          Wind
         Oirwtton
                                               .1*
                                            | 10m TrwcrM Lint
Figure C-9   Example Impact Area Overlay Alignment Relative to Wind
            Direction and Source
                              C-19

-------
Step 3 - Determine Dilution Factors

     •    Select the appropriate dilution factor table as follows:

               Continuous point source (Table C-3).

               Continuous area source.

                    Unstable (Table C-4).
                    Neutral  (Table C-5).
                    Stable (Table C-6).

               Instantaneous source (Table C-7).

          Select  the  stability-specific  dilution  factor  for  downwind
          distance(s) of  interest  (use  the  appropriate column based  on
          source size for area/volume sources).
                                   C-20

-------
       TABLE C-3.  EXAMPLE DILUTION FACTORS - POINT-SOURCE RELEASE
Downwi nd
Distance
(km)
0.1
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
Dilution Factor (dlmensionless)
Unstable*
1.3 x 10-2
6.1 x 10-4
1.7 x 10-4
8.5 x 10-5
5.2 x 10-5
3.5 x 10-5
2.6 x 10-5
2.0 x 10-5
1.6 x 10-5
1.3 x 10-5
1.1 x 10-5
9.4 x 10-6
8.1 x 10-6
7.1 x 10-6
6.3 x 10-6
5.6 x 10-6
5.1 x 10-6
4.6 x 10-6
4.2 x 10-6
3.9 x 10-6
3.6 x 10-6
3.3 x 10-6
3.0 x 10-6
2.8 x 10-6
Neutral*
1.1 x 10-2
6.3 x 10-4
2.0 x 10-4
1.0 x 10-4
6.5 x 10-5
4.6 x 10-5
3.5 x 10-5
2.8 x 10-5
2.3 x 10-5
1.9 x 10-5
1.6 x 10-5
1.4 x 10-5
1.2 x 10-5
1.1 x 10-5
9.9 x 10-6
8.9 x 10-6
8.1 x 10-6
7.4 x 10-6
6.9 x 10-6
6.4 x 10-6
5.9 x 10-6
5.4 x 10-6
5.2 x 10-6
4.8 x 10-6
Stable*
9.4 x 10-3
5.2 x 10-4
1.7 x 10-4
9.2 x 10-5
6.0 x 10-5
4.4 x 10-5
3.4 x 10-5
2.7 x 10-5
2.3 x 10-5
1.9 x 10-5
1.7 x 10-5
1.5 x 10-5
1.3 x 10-5
1.2 x 10-5
1.1 x 10-6
9.9 x 10-5
9.2 x 10-6
8.5 x 10-5
7.9 x 10-6
7.4 x 10-5
6.9 x 10-6
6.5 x 10-5
6.2 x 10-6
5.8 x 10-5
*Atmospheric stability condition as determined from sigma theta reading
   Example values.  Do
   applications.  Site
   applications.
 not  directly  use  these  values  for  site
•specific  values should  be  developed  for actual
                                   C-21

-------
TABLE  C-4.   EXAMPLE DILUTION FACTORS  (DIMENSIONLESS)  -  CONTINUOUS  AREA
                    SOURCE  (UNSTABLE  CONDITIONS) *
Downwind Distance (km)
0.1
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0 - 11.5
Source Area (Acres)
0.5
4.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-4
6.7 x 10-4
6.7 x 10-4
6.7 x 10-4
4.0 x 10-4
4.0 x 10-4
4.0 x 10-4
4.0 x 10-4
1.0
6.7 x 10-1
1.0 x 10-1
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-4
6.7 x 10-4
2.0
6.7 x 10-1
2.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
5.0
6.7 x 10-1
4.0 x 10-1
2.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
*  Example values.  Do not directly use these values for site
   applications.  Site-specific values should be developed for actual
   applications.
                                  C-22

-------
 TABLE  C-5.   EXAMPLE  DILUTION  FACTORS  (DIMENSIONLESS)  -  CONTINUOUS  AREA
                     SOURCE (NEUTRAL CONDITIONS) *
Downwind Distance (km)
0.1
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0 - 11.5
Source Area (Acres)
0.5
4.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
1.0
6.7 x 10-1
1.0 x 10-1
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-2
2.0
6.7 x 10-1
2.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4..C) x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
5.0
6.7 x 10-1
4.0 x 10-1
2.0 x 10-1
1.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
*  Example values.  Do not directly use these values for site
   applications.  Site-specific values should be developed for actual
   applications.
                                  C-23

-------
  TABLE C-6.   EXAMPLE AREA SOURCE DILUTION  FACTORS  (DIMENSIONLESS)  -
                    CONTINUOUS  (STABLE  CONDITIONS) *
Downwind Distance (km)
0.1
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6,0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0 - 11.5
Source Area (Acres)
0.5
4.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
1.0
6.7 x 10-1
2.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0 x 10-3
2.0
6.7 x 10-1
2.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
4.0 x 10-3
5.0
6.7 x 10-1
4.0 x 10-1
2.0 x 10-1
1.0 x 10-1
6.7 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
4.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
2.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-2
1.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
1.0 x 10-3
6.7 x 10-3
*  Example values.  Do not directly use these values for site
   applications.  Site-specific values should be developed for actual
   applications.
                                  C-24

-------
       TABLE  C-7.   EXAMPLE  DILUTION  FACTORS  -  INSTANTANEOUS  RELEASE
Downwind
Distance
(km)
0.1
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
Dilution Factor (dlmenslonless)
Unstable*
























Neutral*
























Stable*
























*  Site-specific values should be developed.
                                   C-25

-------
Step 4 - Estimate Downwind Concentrations

     •    Use Equation C-l if the 10-meter downwind concentration has been
          measured.
                                                (Dilution
           (Concentration      (Concentration  w  Factor              ir -\\
           at Distance X)   s  at  10 m)        x  aj                  (C"1}
                                                Distance X)

          Example:

          A  release  occurs  at  an   excavation  pit.    The measured  peak
          concentration  is  500  parts  per  million  (ppm) at  a  nominal
          distance  of 10 meters from the source.

          According to data from the meteorological tower, the sigma theta
          value indicates neutral stability.

          Using  the   dilution   factor  table,   neutral  stability   at
          1 kilometer yields a dilution factor of  2.0xlO-4.

          The  calculation  using  the  above  formula  for  determining  the
          concentration at  1 kilometer  is  as  follows:

                         500 ppm  x 2.0x10-4   = 1.0x10-1  ppm
                         =  0.01 ppm
                         =  100  parts  per billion (ppb)

          Use  Equation  C-2  to  estimate  10-meter  concentrations  if  the
          default  emission  rates (Table  C-l)  or  measured  emission  rates
          are  used  to  characterize  the  release  (obtain  the  10-meter
          dilution  factor values  from Table C-8).
                                   C-26

-------
      TABLE C-8. EXAMPLE DILUTION FACTORS
  (sec/m3) AT 10 METERS IF EMISSION RATE DATA ARE
                  AVAILABLE*

Point Source
Area Source
0.5 acre
1.0 acre
2.0 acres
5.0 acres
Instantaneous
Unstable







Neutral







Stable







Site-specific values should be  developed.
                      C-27

-------
                                                (Dilution
          (Concentration      (Emission Rate,     Factor at
          at  10 m.  vg/m3)  =  ug/sec)          *  Distance X,
                                                sec/m3)
     •    Use Equations  C-3 and  C-4 to  convert concentration  units, as

          necessary.
 Concentration, ppb *   (Concentration,  yg/m3)  x   24.04              (C-3)

                                                    M
where
     M is the molecular weight of the constituent of interest

     ppb is parts per billion by volume at 20°C
                                                    M
 Concentration, yg/m3 =   (Concentration, ppb) x   _                   (C-4)
                                   C-28

-------
Step 5  - Compare  Concentrations  to Action  Levels, Health  Criteria, and
Odor Thresholds

     •     Compare  concentration  predictions  at  downwind  distances  of
          Interest to the criteria presented  in Table C-9.

     •     If only  total  organic  concentration data are  available,  these
          concentrations    can  be  conservatively   scaled   using   the
          constituent-specific composition values presented in Table C-l.
                                    C-29

-------
                                   TABLE C 9.  EXAMPLE AIR CRITERIA FOR SITE X *

Total Organics
Benzene
Carbon Tetrachloride
Chloroform
Ethyl Benzene
1 , 1 ,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachloroethylene
Site Health and
Safety Plan
Action Levels







STELa
(15 min)

25 ppm
20 ppm
50 ppm
125 ppm
5 ppm

IDLHb
(30 min)

10 ppm
300 ppm
1,000 ppm
2,000 ppm
150 ppm
500 ppm
State ARAR
(1 hr)

0.1 ppm
0.05 ppm
0.1 ppm
1.0 ppm
0.01 ppm
5.0 ppm
PELC
(8 hr)

0.1 ppm
10 ppm
50 ppm
100 ppm
5 ppm
100 ppm
Odor
Threshold

31 ppm
725 ppm
733 ppm


4.7 ppm
o
I
Cv*
o
        a  STEL - Short Term Exposure Limit (ACGIH)
        b  IDLH - Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (NIOSH/OSHA)
        c  PEL - Permissible Exposure Limit (NIOSH/OSHA)

        *  Example values.  Do not directly use these values for site applications.
          Site-specific values should be developed for actual applications.

-------
Step 6 - Estimate Plume Travel Times

     •    Determine  the  downwind  distance  from  the source  to  potential
          receptors of interest.

     •    Select unit  travel  time (i.e., for  1  km or  1  mile) from  Table
          C-10.

     •    Estimate plume travel time based on Equation C-5
          (Travel
          Time to
          Receptor)
(Receptor
Downwi nd
Distance)
(Unit
Travel
Time)
(Eq.  C-5)
                                    C-31

-------
                             TABLE  C-10

                      EXAMPLE PLUME TRAVEL TIME
            VALUES FOR UNIT (1 KM AND 1 MILE) DISTANCES *
Wind Speed
(M/S)
0.447
0.894
1.341
1.788
2.235
2.682
3.129
3.576
4.023
4.470
4.917
5.364
5.811
6.258
6.705
7.152
7.599
8.046
8.493
8.940
Wind Speed
(MPH)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Time to Travel 1 km
Minutes
37.0
18.6
12.4
9.3
7.5
6.2
5.3
4.7
4.1
3.7
3.4
3.1
2.9
2.7
2.5
2.4
2.2
2.1
2.0
1.9
Seconds
2,240
1,120
745
560
450
370
320
280
250
225
205
190
170
160
150
140
130
125
120
1110
Time to Travel 1 Mile
Minutes
60.0
30.0
20.0
15.0
12.0
10.0
8.6
7.5
6.7
6.0
5,5
5.0
4.6
4.3
4.0
3.7
3.5
3.3
3.2
3.0
Seconds
3,600
1,800
1,200
900
720
600
514
450
400
360
327
300
277
257
240
225
212
200
189
180
*  Example values.   Do not directly use these values for site
   applications.   Site-specific values should be developed for actual
   applications.
                                 C-32

-------
Step 7 - Document Assessment/Results




     •    Document the results using a standard form (Table C-ll)




     •    Repeat the steps 1f the release continues.
                                    C-33

-------
                  TABLE  C-ll.   EXAMPLE  OF  APA  FIELD GUIDE
                      INFORMATION FORM (page 1 of 4)

A.   Date: 	  Person providing Information:

B.   Point Source - use Appendix A
                                   (Circle one)
     Area source - use Appendix B

     Area source size: 	acre(s)

C.   OBSERVED DATA                          Time: 	
     Maximum  concentration  at  10  meters from  the  source
     ug/m3 or ppm

     Wind direction*	degrees from true N
     Wind speed*	m/sec
     Sigma theta*	degrees

     *15-minute averages unless otherwise noted

D.   IMPACTED AREA
     Plume direction from the source: 	degrees
     Overlay used:  Unstable     Neutral     Stable (Circle one)
     Impacted receptors of concern  (list): 	   	
E.   DILUTION FACTOR

     Unstable     Neutral    Stable       (Circle one)
                                    C-34

-------
TABLE C-ll (page 2 of 4)
F.   CALCULATE DOWNWIND CONCENTRATION
Distance
(km)
0.1
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
Dilution
Factor























Maximum Concentration
Measured at 10 m (Ch1)
(ug/m3 or ppm)























Computed
Downwind
Concentration
(wg/m3 or
ppm)























Air
Criteria
(ug/m3)























                                    C-35

-------
TABLE C-ll (page 3 of 4)





G.   PLUME TRAVEL TIME





     To potentially Impacted receptors of concern:





     Receptor Distance (Km or Mi)       Travel  Time (minutes or seconds)
H.   COMMENTS
I.   ADDITIONAL INFORMATION





     Spill chemical compound(s)1
     Spill amount:  	gal. or L





     Spill area:    	m2





*If unknown, indicate the compound used for the Health Criteria Assessment
                                   C-36

-------
TABLE C-ll (page 4 of 4)

     Concentrations measured at locations other than 10 meters downwind:
               Location                   Concentration (wg/n»3 or ppm)
                                    C-37

-------
NOTICE TO THE READER - IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO RECEIVE
UPDATED AND/OR REVISED COPIES OF THIS VOLUME IN THE
NATIONAL TECHNICAL GUIDANCE STUDIES SERIES, PLEASE
COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING AND MAIL TO:

     Mr. Joseph Padgett
     U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
     MD-10
     Research Triangle Park, North Carolina  27711
     Volume No.

     Title
     Name
     Address
     Telephone No.

-------